PROJECT CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS...DIVISIONS 11 -14 (NOT INCLUDED) DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 230512 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230548 …

PROJECT CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

CRYSTAL SPRING ELEMENTARY SCHOOL IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT

ROANOKE, VIRGINIA

Prepared by:

VENTURE ARCHITECTS LLC Roanoke, Virginia

FEBRUARY 26, 2016

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 2 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

001045 CUTTING AND PATCHING

024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

DIVISIONS 3 AND 4

042000 UNIT MASONRY

DIVISION 5 - METALS

055000 METAL FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

075423 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING

076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

077100 ROOF SPECIALTIES

077200 ROOF ACCESSORIES

078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

079200 JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS (NOT INCLUDED)

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES

092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

092900 GYPSUM BOARD 095113 ACOUSTIC PANEL CEILINGS

099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

108213 ROOF TOP EQUIPMENT SCREENS

DIVISIONS 11 -14 (NOT INCLUDED)

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING

230512 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

230548 VIBRATION CONTROL

230553 MECHANICAL PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION

230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB)

230713 MECHANICAL INSULATION

230923 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS

231123 NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS

232113 BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS

232300 REFRIGERANT PIPING

233113 AIR DISTRIBUTION

237413 PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS

238126 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT SYSTEM

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

260501 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260529 HANGER AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260534 CONDUIT

260537 BOXES

260553 IDENTIFICAION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

262717 EQUIPMENT WIRING

262726 WIRING DEVICES

262813 FUSES

262818 ENCLOSED SWITCHES

Venture Architects, LLC Improvements Project

Crystal Spring Elementary School

Roanoke City Public Schools

CUTTING AND PATCHING 001045 - 1

SECTION 001045 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE:

A. Perform fitting or patching required to install specified Work. Patch, as required, surfaces not

scheduled or designated to receive new finishes, make parts fit properly, uncover Work to

provide for installation of ill-timed Work, remove and replace defective Work, remove and

replace Work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents, remove samples of

installed Work as specified for testing, and provide routine penetrations in non-structural

surfaces for mechanical and electrical installations.

B. Costs caused by ill-timed Work or Work not conforming to Contract Documents, including

costs for additional services of Architect, shall be borne and paid for by the Contractor.

C. Work done on instructions of Architect, other than defective or non-conforming Work, shall be

borne and paid for by Owner.

2.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:

Section 024119 – SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

3.1 SUBMITTALS: Submit a written request to proceed to Architect well in advance of executing any

cutting or alteration which affects: The work of the Owner or any separate contractor; the structural

integrity of any element of the Project; the integrity or effectiveness of weather-exposed or moisture-

resistant elements or systems; the efficiency, operational life, maintenance or safety of operational

elements; the visual qualities of sight-exposed elements.

4.1 MATERIALS: For replacement of Work removed, comply with Contract Documents for type of Work to

be done.

5.1 INSPECTION:

D. Inspect existing conditions of the Project, including elements subject to damage or to movement

during cutting and patching.

E. After uncovering work, inspect the conditions affecting the installation of products, or

performance of the Work.

F. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to the Architect immediately. Do not proceed

with the Work until the Architect has provided further instructions.

6.1 PREPARATION:

A. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure the structural integrity of the affected

portion of the Work.


Crystal Spring Elementary School


CUTTING AND PATCHING 001045 - 2

B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the Project from damage.

C. Provide protection from the elements for that portion of the Project which may be exposed by

cutting and patching work, and maintain excavations free from water.

7.1 PERFORMANCE:

A. Fitting: Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide finished installation to comply

with specified tolerances and finishes.

B. Cutting: Openings made in concrete construction for installations of piping, etc. shall be

diamond core drilled. Obtain approval from the Architect before cutting any new construction.

C. Patching: Restore Work which has been cut or removed and install new products to provide

completed Work in accord with requirements of Contract Documents.

D. Filling: Remove all existing wall anchoring devices in exterior walls resulting from the removal

of existing access ladders. Fill voids solid with mortar and tool to match adjacent mortar joints.

E. Patching of all openings for new installations and all openings resulting from the removal or

relocation of any installations of equipment shall be done by skilled craftsmen with materials of

like type adjoining openings and as approved by the Architect.

F. Refinish entire surfaces to nearest joint, or change in plane as necessary to provide an even

finish.

END OF SECTION 001045


Crystal Spring Elementary School Roanoke City Public Schools

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain Owner's property. Carefully detach from

existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner. Include fasteners or brackets needed for reattachment elsewhere.

B. Pre-demolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site

improvements. Submit before Work begins.

C. Copies of past asbestos containing survey reports are included at the end of this section. Based

on these reports, is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. If

hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner.

Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with EPA regulations and with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DEMOLITION

A. Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective

demolition operations. Before proceeding with demolition, provide temporary services/systems

that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of the building.

B. Locate, identify, shut off, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and

mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished

according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and

damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.



SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 2

E. Protect all walls, ceilings, floors, roofs, openings and other existing work that are to remain.

Erect and maintain dustproof partitions where necessary to protect adjacent areas from dust due to construction. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been

removed.

F. Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to

prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

G. Provide temporary weather protection to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

H. Requirements for Building Reuse:

1. Maintain adjacent existing building structure (including structural floor and roof decking)

and envelope (exterior skin and framing, window assemblies and nonstructural roofing material) not indicated to be demolished; do not demolish such existing construction

beyond indicated limits.

2. Maintain existing interior nonstructural elements (interior walls, doors, floor coverings, and ceiling systems) at adjacent spaces not indicated to be demolished; do not demolish

such existing construction beyond indicated limits.

I. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.

J. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-

approved landfill. Do not burn demolished materials. Promptly dispose of demolished

materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. If the Contractor fails to

remove excess debris promptly, the Owner reserves the right to remove it at the Contractor’s expense.

K. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition

operations began.

L. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to

ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used

facilities.




UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 1

SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals:

1. Samples for concrete masonry units, face brick and mortar. 2. Material Certificates: For each type of product indicated. Include statements of material

properties indicating compliance with requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UNIT MASONRY

A. Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

2.2 MASONRY UNITS

A. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90; Density Classification, Normal Weight.

B. Clay Face Brick: Grade MW or SW, Type FBX

1. Size: To match existing.

2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT

A. Mortar: ASTM C 270, proportion specification.

1. Use portland cement-lime masonry cement mortar.

2. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar. 3. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M.

4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and nonload-bearing walls and parapet walls; for

interior load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions, and for other

applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. 5. Colored Mortar: For face brick use colored cement or cement-lime mix to match existing

mortar color.

6. Water-Repellent Additive: For mortar used with concrete masonry units made with integral water repellent, use product recommended by manufacturer of units.

B. Grout: ASTM C 476 with a slump of 8 to 11 inches.



UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 2

2.4 REINFORCEMENT, TIES, AND ANCHORS

A. Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A 951/A 951M.

1. Coating: Mill galvanized at interior walls and hot-dip galvanized at exterior walls

2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch diameter.

3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 4. For single-wythe masonry, provide either ladder design or truss design.

B. Veneer Anchors: Hot-dip galvanized steel, two-piece adjustable masonry veneer anchors that

allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to studs, and acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Cut masonry units with saw. Install with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

B. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard unless otherwise indicated.

D. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Clean masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly cured, clean exposed masonry.



Crystal Spring Elementary School Roanoke City Public

METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes miscellaneous shop fabricated metal items.

1. Miscellaneous structural supports. 2. Anchors and fastenings.

3. Protective paints and coatings.


A. Submittals: Shop Drawings.

B. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification

within previous 12 months.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS

A. Structural W-Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M.

B. Structural Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M.

C. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Galvanized

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), Galvanized.

2.2 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide zinc-plated fasteners for exterior use. Select

fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

1. Bolts: ASTM A325; Type 1. a. Finish: Galvanized

2. Nuts: ASTM A563 heavy hex type. a. Finish: Galvanized




3. Washers: ASTM F436; Type 1

a. Finish: Galvanized

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate, connect and install steel shapes as indicated. Shear and punch metals

cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease exposed edges. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without impairing work.

B. Welding: Weld corners and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize

distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. At exposed connections, finish welds and surfaces smooth, with contour of welded surface matching those adjacent.

C. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop brazing. Braze behind finished surfaces

without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed brazed joints of flux, and dress

exposed and contact surfaces.

D. Fabricate ladders for locations shown, complying with ANSI A14.3, welded-steel construction.

2.4 STEEL FINISH

A. Finish all exterior miscellaneous steel per requirements noted in Section 099113 – Exterior Painting.

B. Existing Guardrail Repair:

1. Provide railing and handrail members formed of schedule 40 pipe 2” thick, but not less than that required to support design loading as follows:

a. Handrails and Top rails: Capable of withstanding a concentrated load of 200 lbs.

applied at any point in any direction and a uniform load of 50 lbs. per linear ft.

applied in any direction. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently.

b. Guards: Top rails: Shall withstand a concentrated load of 300 pounds applied at

any point and in any direction, and a uniform load of 100 lbs per linear foot applied in any direction. Concentrated and uniform load need not be assumed to

act concurrently.

c. Intermediate rails, posts: Shall be capable of withstanding a horizontal

concentrated load of 200 lbs. applied on a one square foot area of guard system.

2. Inter-connect members by butt-welding, at fabricator’s option, unless otherwise

indicated.

3. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted guardrails, except where otherwise

indicated.

4. Close exposed ends of pipe by use of welded closures.




5. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at the

edge of open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.

6. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges,

miscellaneous fittings and anchors for interconnections of pipe and attachment of

guardrails to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings and handrails to concrete or masonry work.

7. Field Prep all existing guardrails to be painted:

a. Prepare all exposed steel, surface prep as required by manufacturer of new primer and paint system. Wire brush clean of all loose rust and scale. Inspect all existing

guardrails for structural integrity and proper mounting and fastening. Notify

Architect of any defects.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where needed to secure items to in-place construction.

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, with edges and surfaces level,

plumb, true, and free of rack.

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.




THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 1

SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: Shop Drawings of tapered insulation and ICC-ES evaluation reports for components of membrane roofing system.

B. Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form or customized, without monetary limitation, signed

by roofing manufacturer agreeing to repair leaks due to defects in materials or workmanship for period of 20 years.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) - ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings

and Other Structures, Current Revision.

B. ASTM C 1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal

Insulation Board.

C. ASTM D 6878 - Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based Sheet Roofing

D. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) - Low Slope Roofing and Waterproofing

Manual, Current Edition.

1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Wind Uplift Performance:

1. Roof system is designed to withstand wind uplift forces as calculated using the current revision of ASCE-7

B. Fire Resistance Performance:

1. The new roofing system, combined with existing construction, will achieve a UL Class B

rating when tested in accordance with UL-790.

C. Contractor shall have existing roofing system evaluated for moisture content by environmental

testing agency utilizing infrared equipment. Results of testing services shall be provided to

Architect and Owner for review a minimum ten working days prior to scheduled removal of

existing roofing system. Contractor shall notify Architect and Owner a minimum of five working days prior to the scheduled date for removal of existing roofing system and shall

coordinate a date and time with Architect and Owner to evaluate condition of existing roofing

insulation board and confirm it’s acceptability for installation of proposed new roofing system.




D. Drainage: Provide a roof system with positive drainage where all standing water dissipates within 48 hours after precipitation ends.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

3. Installation methods.

4. Color to be selected by Architect from available colors.

B. Detail Drawings:

1. Submit approved plan, section, elevation or isometric drawings which detail the appropriate methods for all flashing conditions found on the project.

2. Coordinate approved drawings with locations found on the Contract Drawings.

C. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 4 inches (100 mm) square representing actual product, color, and patterns.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: All primary products specified in this section will be supplied by a single manufacturer with a minimum of twenty (20) years experience.

B. Installer Qualifications:

1. All products listed in this section are to be installed by a single installer with a minimum

of five (5) years demonstrated experience in installing products of the same type and

scope as specified. 2. Installer must be capable of extending the Manufacturer's Labor and Materials guarantee.

3. Installer must be capable of extending the Manufacturer's No Dollar Limit guarantee.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Store and dispose of hazardous materials, and materials contaminated by hazardous materials, in

accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) must be on location at all times during the transportation, storage and application of materials.

D. When loading materials onto the roof, the roofing applicator must comply with the requirements

of the building owner to prevent overloading and possible disturbance to the building structure.




1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Proceed with roofing work only when weather conditions are in compliance with the

manufacturer's recommended limitations, and when conditions will permit the work to proceed

in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and recommendations.

B. Proceed with work so new roofing materials are not subject to construction traffic. When

necessary, new roof sections shall be protected and inspected upon completion for possible

damage.

C. Provide protection, such as 3/4 inch thick plywood, for all roof areas exposed to traffic during

construction. Plywood must be smooth and free of fasteners and splinters.

D. The surface on which the insulation or roofing membrane is to be applied shall be clean, smooth,

dry, and free of projections or contaminants that would prevent proper application of or be incompatible with the new installation, such as fins, sharp edges, foreign materials, oil and

grease.

E. New roofing shall be complete and weather tight at the end of the work day

F. Contaminants such as grease, fats and oils shall not be allowed to come in direct contact with the

roofing membrane.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. At project closeout, provide to Owner or Owners Representative an executed copy of the

manufacturer's Total System warranty, outlining its terms, conditions, and exclusions from

coverage.

1. Duration: 20 Years.

B. When positioning membrane sheets, exercise care to locate all field splices away from low spots

and out of drain sumps. All field splices should be shingled to prevent bucking of water.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested

according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.

B. Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272.

C. Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 78 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980.




D. ENERGY STAR Listing: Roofing system shall be listed on the DOE's ENERGY STAR "Roof Products Qualified Product List" for low-slope roof products.

E. Energy Performance: Three-year, aged, solar reflectance not less than 0.55 and emissivity not

less than 0.75 or aged, Solar Reflectance Index of not less than 64.

F. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Roof system will achieve a UL Class A rating when tested in

accordance with UL-790.

G. Thermal Performance: Where it is determined that condition of existing roofing insulation is damaged and cannot maintain adequate insulation properties, the insulation is to be replaced

system will achieve a minimum R value to match that of the existing roofing assembly.

H. Drainage: Provide a roof system with positive drainage where all standing water dissipates

within 48 hours after precipitation ends.

2.2 ROOFING MATERIALS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Firestone Building Products; Carlisle SynTec Incorporated; GAF

Materials Corporation; John Manville; or equal.

B. Fabric-Reinforced TPO Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric- or scrim-reinforced, uniform,

flexible, TPO sheet.

1. Thickness: 80 mils, nominal. 2. Membrane Attachment: Fully Adhered

3. Exposed Face Color: As approved by Owner and Architect from standard colors.

C. Auxiliary Materials: Recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and as

follows:

1. Sheet Flashing: Unreinforced TPO sheet flashing, 60 mils thick, minimum, of same color

as sheet membrane.

2. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Inside Corners: Pre-molded corner flashing for inside corners. 60 mil thickness. Color to

match membrane.

4. Outside Corners: Injection molded corner used for flashing outside corners. 60 mil

thickness. Color to match membrane. 5. Molded Pipe Seals: A pre-molded flashing and clamping ring used for pipe penetrations.

Available for 0.75 inch to 8 inch (19 - 203.2mm) diameter pipes. Color to match

membrane.

D. Protection Walkway Pad:

1. Woven or nonwoven polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fabric; water permeable and

resistant to UV degradation. 2. Pad shall be of thickness required by roofing system manufacturer to maintain overall

roofing system warranty.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=10069&mf=04&src=wd




3. Pad shall be adhered to new roofing membrane as indicated.

2.3 ROOF INSULATION

A. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, Type X,

1/2 inch thick or as required by roofing manufacturer to maintain roofing system warranty.

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2 or 3.

1. Compressive Strength: 20 psi (138 kPa).

2. Density: 2 lb per cubic foot (24 kg/cu m) minimum. 3. Insulation board shall be of type that will accept installation of fully adhered coverboard.

C. Fabricate tapered insulation with slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Preparation: Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. Prepare surfaces using the

methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under

the project conditions. Do not commence work until all other work trades have completed jobs that require them to traverse the deck on foot or with equipment.

B. Insulation: Mechanically fasten roof insulation over existing thermal barrier board to existing

roof deck. Tightly butt insulation boards together. Gaps between board joints shall not exceed 1/4 inch. Attachment must have been successfully tested to meet or exceed the calculated uplift

pressure required by the International Building Code (ASCE-7). Do not install wet, damaged or

warped insulation boards. Do not install any more insulation than will be completely

waterproofed each day.

C. Cover Board: Fully adhere cover boards to insulation board with long joints continuous and

perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered. Loosely butt cover boards together and

fasten to deck.

D. Install fully adhered TPO roofing to coverboard according to roofing system manufacturer's

written instructions and as follows:

1. Adhered Sheet Installation: Apply bonding adhesive to coverboard and underside of sheet

and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of sheet.

E. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap membrane roofing, and hot-air-weld side and end laps of

membrane roofing and sheet flashings. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld

continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of sheet membrane.




F. Base Flashing: Provide a waterproof, fully adhered base flashing system at all penetrations, plane transitions and terminations.

G. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet

flashing.

H. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings.




SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1

SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: Product Data: Shop Drawings and Material and Color Samples

B. Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with adjoining roofing, equipment, piping and conduit to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: For low-slope flashings, shop shall be listed as able to fabricate

required details as tested and approved.

D. Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace sheet metal flashing and trim

that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within 10 years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Standard: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural

Sheet Metal Manual" unless otherwise indicated. Conform to dimensions and profiles shown

unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. FM Approvals' Listing: Manufacture and install copings and roof edge flashings that are listed

in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and approved for windstorm classification, Class 1-90. Identify

materials with name of fabricator and design approved by FM Approvals.

2.2 SHEET METAL

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, not less

than 0.032 inch thick; finished as follows:

1. Finish: Manufacturer's standard two-coat fluoropolymer system with color coat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) resin by weight.

Finish color to match existing as approved by Architect.

2. Concealed Finish: Manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular-threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and

bolts, and other suitable fasteners.



SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 2

1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal roofing using plastic caps or

factory-applied coating. 2. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal

gutter width.

3. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

B. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to the design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and

other characteristics of item indicated.

B. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion

joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with cited sheet metal standards. Allow for thermal expansion; set true to line and

level. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams permanently watertight and weatherproof;

conceal fasteners where possible.

B. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide

for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.

C. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. For aluminum, form seams and seal

with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.

D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, protect against galvanic action or

corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating.

1. Coat concealed side of aluminum with bituminous coating where it contacts wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.




ROOF SPECIALTIES 077100 - 1

SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: Product Data, Color Samples.

B. Warranties: Provide manufacturer's standard written warranty, without monetary limitation, signed by manufacturer agreeing to promptly repair or replace roof specialties that show

evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes for the period of 20 years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings tested according to SPRI ES-1

and capable of resisting design pressures applicable in Roanoke, Virginia.

2.2 ROOF SPECIALTIES

A. Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of formed-metal coping cap, concealed

anchorage, corner units, end cap units, and concealed splice plates.

1. Extruded Aluminum: 0.063 inch thick.

B. Canted Roof-Edge Fascia: Manufactured, two-piece, roof-edge fascia consisting of snap-on

metal fascia cover and a continuous-formed, galvanized-steel sheet cant, 0.028 inch thick,

minimum, with extended vertical leg terminating in a drip-edge cleat.

1. Aluminum: 0.063 inch thick.

C. Gutters and Downspouts:

1. Gutters: Manufactured in uniform section lengths, with matching corner units, ends,

outlet tubes, and other accessories. Elevate back edge at least 1 inch above front edge. Furnish expansion joints and expansion-joint covers. Gutter profile to match existing.

a. Aluminum: 0.063 inch thick.

b. Gutter Supports: Manufacturer's standard supports as selected by Architect with finish matching the gutters.

2. Downspouts: Profile to match existing with mitered elbows. Furnish wall brackets of

same material and finish as downspouts, with anchors.




a. Extruded Aluminum: 0.125 inch thick.

D. Reglets: Manufactured units formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and

counterflashing pieces. Provide reglets with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with

neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge.

1. Formed Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick.

E. Counterflashings: Manufactured units of heights to overlap top edges of base flashings by

minimum 4 inches designed to snap into reglets compress against base flashings with joints lapped.

1. Formed Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 alloy and temper as recommended by manufacturer for

use and finish indicated.

C. Aluminum Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer system with color coat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) resin by weight.

D. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felts.

E. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, High Temperature: Butyl or SBS-modified asphalt; slip-resisting-polyethylene surfaced; with release paper backing; cold applied. Stable after testing at

240 deg F and passes after testing at minus 20 deg F, ASTM D 1970.

F. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to meet

performance requirements.

1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with heads matching color of metal.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel with finish color to

match sheet metal.

G. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant.

H. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof

specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

B. Coat back side of aluminum roof specialties with bituminous coating where they will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

C. Separate dissimilar metals with a bituminous coating or polymer-modified, bituminous sheet

underlayment.

D. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof

specialties for waterproof performance.

E. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet with no joints within 18 inches of corners or

intersections unless indicated.

F. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than recommended by

fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

G. Gutters: Join and seal gutter lengths. Allow for thermal expansion. Attach gutters to firmly anchored gutter supports spaced not more than 24 inches apart. Attach ends with rivets and seal

with sealant to make watertight. Slope to downspouts.

H. Downspouts: Join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls and 1 inch away from walls;

locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c.

I. Reglets: Install reglets to receive flashings where flashing without embedded reglets. Install at

height so that inserted counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings.




ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 1

SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: Product Data

B. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish. Coil-coat finish as follows:

1. Factory Prime Coating: Pretreatment and white or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-

on epoxy primer coat; with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.2 mil.

2.2 ROOF ACCESSORIES

A. Insulated Roof Curbs and Equipment Supports: Fabricate from minimum 0.079-inch-thick,

metallic-coated steel with fully welded or sealed mechanical corner joints.

1. Manufacturers: AES Industries, Roof Products Inc., Plenums Incorporated, or equal 2. Provide units with cant strips and base profile coordinated with roof insulation thickness

and roof deck slope.

3. Provide preservative-treated wood nailers at tops of curbs. 4. Provide manufacturer's standard minimum thickness 1.5 inches thick rigid or semirigid

insulation;

5. Finish: Prime painted.

6. Curb Height: Minimum 8 inch above finished roof or as indicated. 7. Counter Flashing: Minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel.

B. Protective Walkway Pads for Existing EPDM Modified Bitumen Roofing

1. Provide and install 30” x 30” x ½” thick protective walkway pads at existing EPDM and Modified Bitumen roofing systems as indicated. Bond walkway pads to existing roofing

systems per original roofing system manufacturer’s recommendations.



ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify conditions ready to receive work of this Section. Do no work until unsatisfactory

conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Installation: Unless otherwise indicated, install roof accessory items according to construction

details of NRCA's "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." Coordinate with existing concrete

roof structure, roofing, and rigid insulation conditions and installation of roof insulation, roofing, and flashing at curb to ensure combined elements are secure, waterproof, and

weathertight.

B. Install in accordance with Contract Document provisions and manufacturer's instructions.

Where in conflict, assume requirements that are more stringent, and verify with Architect before beginning work.

C. Weld, bolt, or screw roof curbs and expansion joint curbs as instructed by manufacturer, as

shown on accepted shop drawings, and as accepted by Architect.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Replace or repair installations not conforming to specified requirements including installations

out of level and out of plumb.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Leave installation clean, free of debris and residue resulting from work of this Section.




PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1

SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: Product Data and Installer certificates signed by Installer certifying that products

have been installed in compliance with requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

A. Manufacturers :

1. Hilti Corp., Grace Construction Products., 3M Fire Protection Products, Tremco, Inc. or

equal.

B. Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable as

required to meet specified system description and performance requirements; provide only one type for each similar application.

1. Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping: Single or multiple component silicone

elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant. 2. Foam Firestopping Compounds: Single or multiple component foam compound.

3. Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated compound

mixed with incombustible non-asbestos fibers. 4. Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping: Composite of mineral or ceramic fiber stuffing

insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping.

5. Mechanical Firestopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical device with incombustible

fillers and silicone elastomer, covered with sheet stainless steel jacket, joined with collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops.

6. Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which expands on exposure to

surface heat gain. 7. Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows.

C. Provide penetration firestopping materials that are compatible with one another, substrates, and

penetrating items if any.

D. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls and Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a

positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.

1. F-Rating at Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Not less than that of construction penetrated.




2. F-Rating at Horizontal Assemblies: At least 1 hour, but not less than that of construction

penetrated. 3. T-Rating at Horizontal Assemblies: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance

rating of construction penetrated except for penetrations within the cavity of a wall

E. Items shall be tested to specific parameters, including the type and numbers of penetrating items, the size of the penetrating items, the maximum allowable annular space, and the rated

hourly requirement of the structure.

F. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

G. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to

install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by

penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for applications noted and found in field.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire ratings.

B. Permanent Damming/Backing Material: Semi-refractory fiber (mineral wool) insulation.

C. Permanent Forming Materials:

1. Mineral fiberboard.

2. Mineral fiber matting.

3. Sheet metal.

4. Alumina silicate fire board.

D. Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other

devices required to position and retain materials in place.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation

instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels will be

visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Include the following

information on labels:




1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building

Management of Any Damage." 2. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

3. Manufacturer's name.

4. Installer's name.

C. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting bond of firestopping material.

B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond.

C. Install backing or damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating

sleeves, piping, ductwork, conduit and other items, requiring firestopping.

B. Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings.

C. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke rating, to

uniform density and texture.

D. Compress fibered material to maximum 40 percent of its uncompressed size.

E. Place foamed material in layers to ensure homogenous density, filling cavities and spaces. Place

sealant to completely seal junctions with adjacent dissimilar materials.

F. Place intumescent coating in sufficient coats to achieve rating required.

G. Dam material to remain.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPS

A. Comply with the System Performance Requirements in Part 1, with ASTM C1193, and the through-penetration firestop manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to

products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming/damming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill

materials during their application and in the position needed to produce the cross sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings of designated through-penetration firestop

systems; after installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other




accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems. Install fill materials for

through-penetration firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories

and penetrating items.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce

smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF FIRE RESISTIVE JOINT SEALANTS

A. A. Comply with the System Performance Requirements in Part 1, with ASTM C1193, and with the

sealant manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications

indicated.




JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: Product Data.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or

are

PART 2 - PRODUCTS below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS

A. Low-Emitting Materials:

1. Exterior reactive sealants shall have a VOC content of not more than 50 g/L or 4 percent

by weight, whichever is greater. 2. Other exterior caulks and sealants shall have a VOC content of not more than 30 g/L or 2

percent by weight, whichever is greater.

B. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under service and application conditions.

C. Sealant for General Exterior Use:

1. Single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; for Use NT.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Provide sealant backings of materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates,

sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of size and density to control sealant depth and

otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or

joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.



JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 2

D. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C 1193.

B. Install sealant backings to support sealants during application and to produce cross-sectional

shapes and depths of installed sealants that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants

and backs of joints.




NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those found

within existing rated assemblies found acceptable with ASTM E 119 and to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 METAL FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. Steel Framing Members, General: ASTM C 754.

1. Steel Sheet Components: ASTM C 645. Thickness specified is minimum uncoated base-metal thickness.

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized

B. Framing Systems:

1. Studs and Runners: In depth indicated and 0.027 inch thick unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power,

and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install new steel framing where required for installation of new mechanical system piping and

ductwork within existing walls, chases and enclosures.

B. Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754.



NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 2

1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with ASTM C 841.

2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with ASTM C 1063. 3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with ASTM C 844.

4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with ASTM C 840.

C. Isolate steel framing from building structure, except at floor, to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install isolation strip between

studs and wall.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Install new steel framing to match and comply with ratings

of existing construction.




GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested

in assemblies per ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in

assemblies per ASTM E 90 and classified per ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing

and inspecting agency.

2.2 PANEL PRODUCTS

A. Provide in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.

B. Interior Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, in thickness indicated or as required to match existing with manufacturer's standard edges. Regular type unless otherwise indicated. Type X

as required to match and maintain fire-resistance-rated assemblies.

1. Manufacturer: a. National Gypsum Company, United States Gypsum Company, Georgia-Pacific

Building Products, or equal

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Trim Accessories: ASTM C 1047, formed from galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet.

1. Provide cornerbead at outside corners unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide LC-bead (J-bead) at exposed panel edges. 3. Provide control joints where indicated.

B. Joint-Treatment Materials: ASTM C 475/C 475M.

1. Joint Tape: Paper unless otherwise recommended by panel manufacturer.



GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2

2. Joint Compounds: Setting-type taping compound and drying-type, ready-mixed,

compounds for topping.

C. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex

sealant complying with ASTM C 834.

1. Sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840. 1. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Fasten gypsum panels to supports with screws.

B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Install new wall construction to match listing of existing,

rated construction unless noted otherwise.

C. Finishing Gypsum Board: ASTM C 840.

1. At concealed areas, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated

assemblies, provide Level 1 finish: Embed tape at joints.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide Level 4 finish: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges.

A. Finish: Finish gypsum board to match adjacent surfaces unless noted otherwise.




ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1

SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: Product Data and Samples.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic Standard: Acoustical panel ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions

determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS

A. Classification: As follows, per ASTM E 1264:

1. Type and Form: Type III, Form 2 at Corridors; Type IV, Form 2 at Cafeteria and Kitchen

2. Pattern: To match existing at corridors, classrooms, and offices. 3. LRC: Not less than 0.70-.80

4. NRC: Not less than 0.60

5. CAC: Not less than 35-39 6. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Class A, 25 or less.

7. Humidity Resistance: 90% RH/29 degrees C

B. Manufacturers:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Certain Teed, United States Gypsum Corporation, or equal.

C. Color: White to match existing.

D. Edge Detail: To match existing.

E. Thickness: 3/4 inch.

F. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches.

2.3 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Manufacturers:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Certain Teed, United States Gypsum Corporation, or equal.



ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 2

B. Ceiling Suspension System:

1. Cafeteria: Wide-face, direct-hung system; ASTM C 635, intermediate-duty structural classification at Cafeteria.

a. Face Design: Flat, flush.

b. Face Finish: Painted white

2. All other spaces and rooms unless noted otherwise: To match existing.

C. Attachment Devices: Sized for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,

Direct Hung, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1

zinc coating, soft temper.

1. Size: Provide yield strength at least 3 times the hanger design load (ASTM C 635,

Table 1, Direct Hung), but not less than 0.135-inch-diameter wire.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Replace ceiling tile and suspended grid damaged during construction with panels and suspension grid to match existing at all spaces/rooms other than Cafeteria and Kitchen unless

noted otherwise. Install new acoustic panels and suspension system throughout Cafeteria and

Kitchen.

B. Install acoustical ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M according to manufacturer's

written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

C. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system

runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.




EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 1

SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals:

1. Product Data: Include printout of MPI's "MPI Approved Products List" with product highlighted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINT

A. Manufacturers: Benjamin Moore, Behr, Glidden, Duron, Sherwin Williams, or equal.

B. MPI Standards: Provide materials that comply with MPI standards indicated and listed in its

"MPI Approved Products List."

1. Primer, Alkyd, Anticorrosive: MPI #79. 2. Primer, Alkyd: MPI #5.

3. Alkyd, Exterior, Semigloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #94.

C. Material Compatibility: Provide materials that are compatible with one another and with substrates.

1. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by

manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

D. Colors: As selected by Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Comply with recommendations in MPI's "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove rust and peeling paint from all existing steel surfaces.

C. Clean and prepare surfaces in an area before beginning painting in that area. Schedule painting so cleaning operations will not damage newly painted surfaces.




EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 2

D. Mask items that cannot be removed and adjacent surfaces not to be painted.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Comply with recommendations in MPI's "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual"

applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Paint exposed new material surfaces, existing construction that has been modified, patched or repaired unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not paint prefinished items, items with an integral finish, operating parts, and labels

unless otherwise indicated.

C. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use brushes only where the use of other applicators is not practical.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,

roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

1. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured

film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

3.3 EXTERIOR PAINT APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Steel: Apply new paint finish as follows to new steel surfaces, existing roof perimeter

guardrails to remain, existing rooftop mechanical unit support dunnage, existing steel surfaces where new steel is installed and/or anchored. Apply new paint finish to other existing steel

where indicated.

1. Semigloss Alkyd: Two coats over alkyd anticorrosive primer: MPI EXT 5.1D.

B. Galvanized Metal:

1. Semigloss Alkyd: Two coats over primer recommended by topcoat manufacturer for

exterior use on galvanized-metal.




INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals:

1. Product Data: Include printout of MPI's "MPI Approved Products List" with product highlighted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINT

A. Manufacturers: Benjamin Moore, Behr, Glidden, Duron, Sherwin Williams, or equal.

B. Unless otherwise noted, all painting work shall be in accordance with MPI Premium Grade

finish requirements.

C. MPI Standards: Provide materials that comply with MPI standards indicated and listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."

1. Primer Sealer, Latex: MPI #50. 2. Latex, Interior; Finish, Color, Gloss / Sheen: Comply with MPI standard that matches

existing adjacent surfaces unless noted otherwise.

D. Material Compatibility: Provide materials that are compatible with one another and with substrates.

1. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by

manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

E. Paints and coatings shall comply with the following limits for VOC content:

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.

2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings: 150 g/L.

3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 4. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.

F. Finish, Color, Gloss / Sheen: To match existing unless noted otherwise.

G. Mechanical / Electrical Equipment and Related Surfaces:





1. Unless otherwise specified or noted, paint all “unfinished” new conduits, piping, hangers,

ductwork and other mechanical and electrical equipment with color and texture to match adjacent surfaces, in the following areas:

a. where exposed-to-view in all exterior and interior areas. b. in all interior high humidity interior areas.

c. in all boiler room, mechanical and electrical rooms.

2. In unfinished areas leave existing exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and electrical equipment in original finish and touch up scratches and marks.

Do not paint over nameplates.

3. Paint the inside of all ductwork where visible behind louvers, grilles and diffusers beyond

sight line with primer and one coat of matt black (non-reflecting) paint. Paint the inside of light valances gloss white.

4. Refer to Mechanical and Electrical specifications for painting, banding, stenciling of

other surfaces / equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION


B. Remove hardware, lighting fixtures, and similar items that are not to be painted. Mask items

that cannot be removed. Reinstall items in each area after painting is complete.

C. Clean and prepare surfaces in an area before beginning painting in that area. Schedule painting so cleaning operations will not damage newly painted surfaces.

3.2 APPLICATION


B. Paint exposed new surfaces and where existing construction has been modified or patched and

repaired unless otherwise indicated.

1. Color-code mechanical piping in accessible ceiling spaces. 2. Do not paint prefinished items, items with an integral finish, operating parts, and labels

unless otherwise indicated.

C. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use brushes only where the use of other applicators is not practical.




2. Use rollers for finish coat on interior walls and ceilings.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color

breaks.

1. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

3.3 INTERIOR PAINT APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. New and Existing Gypsum Board and Plaster:

1. Latex: Two coats over latex primer/sealer

2. Paint interior surfaces in accordance with the following MPI Painting Manual

requirements: INT 9.2M Institutional low odor / low VOC with finish, color, gloss/sheen

to match existing unless noted otherwise.

B. Concrete Masonry Units:

1. Paint interior surfaces in accordance with the following MPI Painting Manual

requirements: Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex; Two coats over latex block filler: MPI INT 4.2E. Finish, color, gloss/sheen to match existing unless noted otherwise.

C. Steel:

1. Paint interior surfaces in accordance with the following MPI Painting Manual requirements: Latex: Two coats over quick-drying alkyd primer: MPI INT 5.1Q.




ROOF TOP EQUIPMENT SCREENS 108213- 1

SECTION 108213 – ROOF TOP EQUIPMENT SCREENS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Pre-formed thermoplastic panel for enclosing roof top mechanical equipment.

2. Aluminum assembly framing for direct attachment of screening panels to rooftop mounted

steel framing or existing steel mechanical unit dunnage as indicated.

3. Sliding panels to permit easy access to mechanical equipment for servicing.

B. Products Not Installed or Furnished in This Section:

1. Touch-up painting required for scratches and screw heads.

2. Field painting of prime painted screens

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials: Standard Specifications for

1. ASTM B 221-96 - Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire Profiles, and Tubes.

B. The Aluminum Association, Inc.

1. AA ADM-1516166 (1994) - Aluminum Design Manual

C. American Society of Civil Engineers.

1. ASCE 7-95 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Manufacturer is responsible for the structural design of all materials, assembly and attachments to

resist snow, wind, suction and uplift loading at any point without damage or permanent set.

1. Framing shall be designed in accordance with the Aluminum Design Manual to resist the

following loading:

a. ASCE 7-95 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures;

American Society of Civil Engineers.




1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog data, detail sheets, specification and other data

sufficient to indicate compliance with these specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layouts heights, component connection details, and details of interface

with adjacent construction. Mark data to indicate:

1. Roof top mechanical equipment to be enclosed.

C. Samples:

1. Samples of Materials: Thermoplastic panels.

2. Color Selection: Submit paint chart with full range of colors available for Architect's

selection.

D. Certification: Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance certifying that thermoplastic panels

supplied meet or exceed requirements specified.

E. Closeout Submittals: Warranty documents, issued and executed by manufacturer, countersigned by Contractor.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of building authorities having jurisdiction

in Project location.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years documented experience producing systems

specified in this section.

C. Pre-Installation Meeting:

1. Convene at job site seven (7) calendar days prior to scheduled beginning of construction

activities of this section to review requirements of this section.

2. Require attendance by representatives of the installing subcontractor, (who will represent

the system manufacturer) and other entities directly affected by construction activities of

this section.

3. Notify Architect four (4) calendar days in advance of scheduled meeting date.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging,

with labels clearly indicating manufacturer and material.




B. Storage and Handling: Protect materials and finishes during handling and installation to prevent damage.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Take measurements of new rooftop mounted support steel framing or

existing steel dunnage for fit without gaps. Indicate measurements on shop drawings fully

documenting any field condition that may interfere with the screen system installation.

1.08 COORDINATION

A. Installer for work under this Section shall be responsible for coordination of panel and framing

sizes and required options with the Contractor's requirements.

1. Request information on sizes and options required from the Contractor.

B. Submit shop drawings to the Contractor and obtain written approval of shop drawing from the

Contractor prior to fabrication.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. If any part of the rooftop equipment screen fails because of a manufacturing defect within one

year from the date of substantial completion, the manufacturer will furnish without charge the

required replacement part(s). Any local transportation, related service labor or diagnostic call

charges are not included.

B. This warranty does not cover failure of your rooftop equipment screen if it is damaged by the

Owner, or if the failure is caused by improper installation. In no event shall Warrantor be liable

for incidental or consequential damages.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS/PRODUCT

A. Envisor Screening System by CityScapes Incorporated or equal.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Thermoformed Plastic Panels: Fabricated from rigid medium impact thermo-formed ABS (Acrylic Butylene Styrene) sheets.

1. Minimum thickness: 3/16 inch.




B. Framing: Aluminum Plate, Shapes and Bar: ASTM B 221, alloy 6061-T5 or 6063-T5.

C. Threaded Fasteners: All screws, bolts, nut and washers shall be Stainless steel.

1. Corner assembly fasteners shall be #10-16 x stainless steel TEK screws. Length as

required to develop full holding capacity of screw when fastened to rooftop steel support

framing or existing steel dunnage.

2. Provide lock washer or other locking device at all bolted connections.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Provide factory-formed panel systems with continuous interlocking panel connections and

indicated or necessary components. Form all components true to shape, accurate in size, square

and free from distortion or defects. Cut panels to precise lengths indicated on approved shop

drawings.

B. Fabricate all panels to slide horizontally to allow access to and minimum three feet face clearance

in front of all unit access panels. Coordinate access minimum access requirements with

mechanical equipment manufacturer.

C. Panel Design, Style, Trim:

1. Panel Style: As selected by architect from manufacturer’s standard panel style options.

2. Panel Design: As selected by architect from manufacturer’s standard panel design options.

3. Decorative Top Trim Profile: As selected by architect from manufacturer’s standard

decorative top trim options.

4. Trim and Closures: Fabricated from 24 gage metal, and finished with the manufacturers

standard coating system, unless shown otherwise on drawings.

D. Framing: Fabricate and assemble components in largest practical sizes, for delivery to the site.

1. Construct corner assemblies to required shape with joints tightly fitted.

2. Supply components required for anchorage of framing. Fabricate anchors and related components of material and finish as required, or as specifically noted.

2.04 FINISHES

A. Aluminum Framing: Mill finish.

B. Panel Coating: Manufacturer's standard coating system, factory-applied.

1. Color: As approved by Architect.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Installer's Examination: Examine conditions under which construction activities of this section

are to be performed.

1. Submit written notification to Architect and Screen manufacturer if such conditions are

unacceptable.

2. Beginning erection constitutes installer's acceptance of conditions.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install units in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings.

Keep perimeter lines straight, plumb, and level. Provide brackets, anchors, and accessories necessary for a complete installation.

B. Paint new steel support framing and/or existing steel dunnage to match color and finish of new

screening panels prior to installation of screening panels.

C. Insert thermoplastic panels into structural supports, except where fixed attachment points are

indicated. Butt thermoplastic panels to adjacent panels for uniform fit. Fasten fixed panels in

accordance with the shop drawings.

D. Metal Separation: Where aluminum materials would contact dissimilar materials, insert rubber

grommets at attachment points, thus eliminating where dissimilar metals would otherwise be in

contact.

E. Do not cut or abrade finishes which cannot be restored. Return items with such finishes to shop for required alterations.

3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum misalignment from true position: ¼ inch (12 mm).

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove all protective masking from material immediately after installation.

B. Protection:

1. Ensure that finishes and structure of installed systems are not damaged by subsequent

construction activities.

2. If minor damage to finishes occurs, repair damage in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations; provide replacement components if repaired finishes are unacceptable to

Architect.




C. Prior to Substantial Completion: Remove dust or other foreign matter from component surfaces;

clean finishes in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Clean units in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.


Venture Architects, LLC Crystal Springs Elementary School Improvements Project


BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230512 - 1

SECTION 230512 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE: This Section specifies the basic requirements for mechanical installations and includes requirements common to all Sections of Division 23. The mechanical drawings show the general arrangement of all piping, ductwork, equipment and appurtenances and shall be coordinated and installed as closely as actual building construction and the work of other trades will permit. Because of the small scale of the mechanical drawings, it is not feasible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories which may be required. The Contractor shall investigate the construction conditions affecting the Work, adjust the location of equipment, piping and ductwork, and provide fittings and accessories as required to meet actual conditions, and provide maximum service clearances.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturer and installer qualifications listed below shall apply to all

of Division 23 unless specifically noted otherwise in an individual Specification Section.

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of equipment and materials specified, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on

projects with equipment and materials similar to that required for this project.

C. Codes and Standards: Comply with applicable portions of latest available edition of listed codes and standards. The following list contains codes and standards which appear throughout Division 15 as abbreviations. Not all codes and standards are listed below:

ANSI - American National Standards Institute ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Engineers ASTM - American Society for Testing & Materials AWS - American Welding Society BOCA - Building Officials & Code Administrators International, Inc. FM - Factory Mutual System FS - Federal Specification MS - Military Specification IPC - International Plumbing Code IMC - International Mechanical Code NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA - National Fire Protection Association OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Act SMACNA - Sheet Metal Air Conditioning Contractors National Association UL - Underwriters Laboratories VUSBC - Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code

D. Testing Agency: When equipment is not available as an assembly labeled by a nationally recognized approved testing agency, the Contractor shall submit with the shop drawings a letter from the manufacturer's engineering department, signed and sealed by an Engineer registered in the Commonwealth of Virginia, stating that all electrical components of the equipment are UL listed, and that the equipment meets and/or exceeds the safety and performance requirements as outlined in the Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code.




1.1. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: Deliver products to project site properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and handling. Store equipment and materials at the site, unless off-site storage is authorized in writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from physical damage and weather exposure conditions. Coordinate deliveries of mechanical materials and equipment to minimize construction site congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installations. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and moving instruction for unloading equipment and moving into final location.

1.2. ACCESSIBILITY:

A. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for entry, servicing, maintenance, replacement and to meet all minimum code requirements. Access clearance around floor and roof mounted equipment shall not be less than 3'-0". Where mechanical cooling is installed to serve elevator machine rooms, coordinate all mechanical work with the final (approved) elevator equipment layout and applicable elevator code. Mechanical equipment, piping, etc. will not be permitted to be located above or over-hang any elevator equipment, control panels or electric devices. Access and working clearance in front of electric panels, control panels, switches, etc. having a working voltage greater than 30 volts, shall be not less than 3'-0", or as required by NEC for higher voltage systems. Access clearance shall be full width of panel, but not less than 2'-6", and shall extend from the electric device to the floor or work platform. DO NOT route ductwork and piping directly above electric panels. Extend grease fittings for all specified equipment to an easily accessible location outside of the equipment casing. Roof mounted equipment located within 10'-0" of the edge of or offset in roof plane will require personnel safety railing as required by the IMC.

B. Access Doors:

1. Coordinate the final location of access doors with concealed equipment and devices requiring

access. Access units shall be of adequate size and shall match the wall, floor and ceiling rating and construction type. Access doors located in showers and/or areas with ceramic or glazed structural tile shall be stainless steel type. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that will likely require replacement or servicing during the normal life of equipment.

2. Submittal Requirement: Prior to installation of equipment and materials requiring access doors,

prepare in ample time for proper coordination and review by the Architect, one (1) set of architectural prints marked with size and approximate location of all access doors. This requirement applies only to those access doors located in finished/occupied spaces and shall be fully coordinated with and reviewed by both the the General Contractor and shall be approved by the Project Architect prior to installation.

1.3. ROUGH-IN: Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of

the actual equipment to be connected. Special attention shall be given to alignment of new work with door swings, block coursing, ceiling tile, and other similar building features before rough-in of mechanical work.

1.4. MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS:

A. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building components.

Verify all dimensions by field measurements, prior to ordering. Arrange for chases, wall and floor openings in other building components to allow for mechanical installations. The design layout of equipment shown on the Contract Documents is based on the equipment listed on the Equipment




Schedules. All other manufacturers and/or model numbers shall be considered substitute equipment, including equipment manufacturers listed as acceptable suppliers. The Contractor shall assume fully responsibility for the installation coordination of all substitute equipment, including the requirement that minimum manufacturer and code clearances be maintained on all sides.

B. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place

concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.

C. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building.

D. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of

mechanical equipment and materials.

E. Where mounting heights of ducts, piping and suspended equipment are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible, but never less than the Code required overhead height. Coordinate the installation of mechanical materials and equipment above ceilings with structure, ceiling suspension system, light fixtures, and other installations. In no case will ceiling heights be lowered without the written approval of the Architect.

F. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate maintenance, repair and/or replacement of equipment

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.

G. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with existing exterior, underground, and overhead

utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.

H. Equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions to conform with

the details and arrangement shown on drawings.

I. Provide necessary supports for all equipment and appurtenances as required; this includes, but is not limited to, frames and supports for items such as tanks, plumbing fixtures, pumps, valves, air conditioning/handling units, energy recovery units, fans, air terminal units, fan coil units, and other similar items requiring support.

J. Temporary filters shall be provided for all air handling units that are operated during construction.

The ends of all pipes, ducts and equipment openings shall be kept plugged or capped with approved devices such as specially molded plastic caps, pipe plugs, test plugs and sheet metal caps. All open-ended ductwork shall be capped using polyethylene sheeting and duct tape at all times from installation until final connections are made to complete the system. Ductwork contaminated with dust, dirt or other unacceptable debris, shall be taken down and thoroughly cleaned, then reinstalled and properly capped. After rain leaders are connected to roof drains, they shall not be plugged or capped unless required to prevent flooding of construction.

K. Provide necessary openings in existing walls and floors to allow for duct and pipe penetrations.

Provide adequate clearance for installation of fire dampers and pipe or duct insulation.

1.5. CUTTING AND PATCHING:




A. All Work shall be laid out and coordinated sufficiently in advance of new construction in order to permit installation of supports, sleeves, inserts, and similar items without cutting. Cutting which will in anyway affect the building structure shall not be performed without the written permission of the Architect and/or Structural Engineer.

B. Patching and repair work shall be handled by the General Contractor and shall match surrounding

surfaces in both material and finishes.

C. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.

D. Locate, identify, and protect mechanical services passing through the project site and serving other

areas required to be maintained operational. When services must be interrupted, schedule all shutdowns with the Owner a minimum of 2 days prior to implementing. Provide temporary services for the affected areas required to remain in operation.

1.6. MECHANICAL SUBMITTALS: The review of shop drawings by Engineer is done as a courtesy to the

Contractor to verify that equipment and materials being proposed are suitable for use and to protect the Owner's interest and project design integrity.

A. Submittals of shop drawings, product data and samples will be accepted and reviewed only when

submitted by the Project General Contractor. Data submitted directly by sub-contractors and equipment suppliers will not be processed. Each item submitted for review shall bear the mechanical sub-contractor's stamp which states that he has reviewed the submission, that it is complete, and that it meets the intent and requirements of the contract.

B. Shop drawings, product data, samples and such other data necessary to fully describe and

substantiate compliance with these specifications shall be submitted for all equipment and materials identified with the symbol (S) behind the product title. Items requiring special submittal data will be so noted as part of equipment specification. Shop drawings for equipment with electrical connections shall include a wiring diagram with all interlocking control devices and field wiring clearly indicated. Equipment submittals shall indicate size, weight, capacity, performance, motor HP or KW, phase and voltage, and any other information needed to verify suitability and compliance. Submit a manufacturer’s color chart for finishes options for each item of equipment and material exposed in a finished area. Where the finish is labeled “custom color” as selected by the Architect, no color chart is required since the Architect will select color and finish as designated by a manufacturer’s name and product number.

1.7. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA: O & M manuals will be reviewed by the Project

Mechanical Engineers for completeness prior to submission to the Owner.

A. Operation and maintenance data shall be provided for all equipment and systems identified in Division 23 with the symbol (O/M) behind the product title. Any equipment or system requiring special operating and maintenance instructions over and above will be so noted as part of the equipment, material or system specification and shall be included as part of the O/M manuals. Division 23 O/M Manuals shall be independent of other Divisions' work, and shall include a complete index in each volume listing the products and "tab" designation, manufacturer's name, and the local representative's name, address, telephone, fax number, and e-mail address.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be configured to match the order of the specification

sections, with individual tabs for each major item of equipment and/or group of similar materials. Each tabbed section shall be arranged as follows: Approved shop drawing or product data sheet;




installation guide; service manual; illustrated parts lists; assembly drawings; wiring/control diagrams; bonds and warranties; and other appropriate data. Not all of the above data will be available for each item of equipment. Items listed in the specifications requiring only a shop drawing labeled with the symbol (S) behind the project title, [ie. Pipe Insulation(S)], shall be included in the O/M manuals so that the Owner has a complete set of all "approved" shop drawings for future reference.

1.8. RECORD DOCUMENTS: The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of PROJECT

RECORD DOCUMENTS.

A. Mark Drawings to indicate revisions to piping and ductwork sizes and locations including locations of coils, dampers and other control devices, filters, air terminal units, and similar units requiring periodic maintenance or repair; actual equipment locations, actual inverts and locations of underground and under floor piping; concealed equipment, dimensions to column lines or building walls; mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered; change orders; and concealed control system devices. The marking of "Record Documents" shall be kept current during construction and shall be made available for review by the Mechanical Engineer during normal site visits, if requested to do so.

B. Mark Specifications to indicate approved substitutions; change orders, and actual equipment and

materials used.

1.9. INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: Furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to the Owner's personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of each item of equipment. Each instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work. Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Owner for regular operation. Instructors shall use a copy of the Operation and Maintenance Data manual as a guide for Owner's training and shall spend such time as necessary to fully prepare the Owner's representative to operate and maintain the Mechanical Systems. Additional Owner training is outlined in some Division 23 sections. The Project Mechanical Engineer shall be notified as to the date and time these training sessions are scheduled and shall reserve the right to attend any or all such sessions.

1.10. WARRANTIES: Refer to WARRANTIES AND BONDS for procedures and submittal

requirements for warranties. Refer to individual equipment specifications for extended warranty requirements. The start date of all warranties (1year and extended) shall begin as of the date of the Architect’s substantial completion final inspection. If the Owner takes early occupancy of the facility, prior to the substantial completion final inspection, then the warranty shall be set to begin as of that date.

A. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Division 23, into the appropriate section of the

Operation and Maintenance Data Manual.

B. Provide complete warranty information for each item of equipment as specified, and include date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses, telephone and fax numbers and procedures for filing a claim to obtain warranty services.

1.11. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: After installation of equipment, materials, systems, etc., field test

to demonstrate proper operation and performance. Items requiring repair or modification shall be field corrected when possible and re-tested to demonstrate compliance. Replace all items which cannot be satisfactorily field corrected.




1.12. CLEANING: Refer to CLEANING, for general requirements for final cleaning. Refer to Division

23 Sections for specific cleaning instructions, and TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING, for requirements for cleaning filters, strainers and mechanical systems, prior to TAB work and final acceptance. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint.

1.13. PROTECTION FROM MOVING PARTS: Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, shafts, couplings, and

other rotating or moving parts located so that persons may come in close proximity thereto shall be fully enclosed or properly guarded to prevent injury.

1.14. EXISTING EQUIPMENT REMOVAL: All items of equipment removed as a part of this project

shall be offered to the Owner as salvage. All items refused by the Owner shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site and disposed of by the Contractor within two (2) days of removal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION - (Not Used) END OF SECTION 230512



VIBRATION CONTROL 230548 - 1

SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:

A. Vibration control and seismic restraint products furnished as integral part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division-23 sections. However, this section shall be used as a reference for the selection and installation of all vibration and noise control furnished as part of stand alone equipment assemblies.

B. Refer to other Division-23 sections for equipment foundations, supports, sealants, gaskets,

requirements of electrical connections, duct connections, flexible pipe connections, and other work related to Vibration Control. Coordinate vibration isolation work with required seismic restraint requirements and submit as a single package.

1.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of vibration control and seismic

restraint products, of type, size, and capacity required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. Obtain vibration control products from a single manufacturer when possible. Manufacturer's representative shall provide technical supervision of selection and installation of vibration control products.

1.3. SUBMITTALS: Refer to Section 230512 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS for general

requirements and procedures for submittals.

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each type of vibration control product. Submit schedule showing size, type, load capacity, deflection, HP and RPM of driven component, degree of isolation provided, and location for each product furnished.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating dimensions,

weights, required clearances, and method of assembly of components. Detail bases, and show location of equipment anchoring points, coordinated with approved equipment manufacturer's shop drawings. Seismic restraint details shall be designed based on calculations detailing equipment weight, forces, center of gravity, etc. and shall be included with the shop drawing submittal.

C. Verification: The vibration control and seismic restraint manufacturer's representative shall submit

a letter at the conclusion of the project stating that he has visited the project site and he has verified that all items furnished for the project have been installed properly and that all equipment is being adequately isolated and/or restrained.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. MANUFACTURER: Provide vibration control products by Amber/Booth Company, Inc.; Mason Industries, Inc.; Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.; Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. or Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc./Korfund.

2.2. VIBRATION CONTROL MATERIALS: All materials shall be color-coded to indicate the different

loading ranges.

A. Type FP Fiberglass Pads: Glass fiber of not more than 0.18 mil diameter, produced by multi-flame attenuation process, molded with manufacturer's standard fillers and binders, and pre-stabilized by




10 compression cycles to 3 times the maximum published load to achieve a natural frequency of not more than 12 Hz. Each unit shall be molded to the thickness and shape needed and individually coated with a flexible, moisture impervious elastomeric membrane.

B. Type N Neoprene Pads: Water and oil-resistant compounds shall be molded in a range of 30-70

durometer hardness and shall be multi-layered, cross-ribbed or waffled pattern designed to permit a range of 50-90 psi loading at maximum rated deflections.

C. Type C Cork Pads: Close grained composition cork sheets, laminated to thickness required.

D. Type S Springs: Free standing steel compression springs, of high strength, heat treated, spring

alloy steel; with spring diameter not less than 80% of compressed height of spring at rated loads and a lateral stiffness not less than 90% of vertical stiffness. Springs used in assemblies installed outdoors or in corrosive environments shall be coated to prevent corrosion. Reserved spring travel to "solid" shall be not less than 50% of the rated deflection.

E. Type NRC Pad: Composite pad comprised of a top and bottom neoprene waffle pad of ¼”

thickness and a ½” thick center core of sound/vibration absorbing pad. Amber/Booth AMPAD or equal.

2.3. VIBRATION ISOLATOR TYPES:

A. Ratings: Each isolator shall be selected to match required loading and shall be externally color

coded for identification of rated load capacity.

B. Hangers: All hangers shall be comprised of an isolator encased in a welded steel bracket. Hanger bracket shall be designed to carry five (5) times overload capacity without failure, and shall allow up to 30 rod misalignment without metal to metal contact. Provide Type FGH, fiberglass pad; Type NH, neoprene pad; Type FGSH, fiberglass pad and open spring in series; or Type NSH, neoprene pad and open spring in series, as required by installation.

C. Equipment Supports:

1. Type S, free standing open spring mount consisting of steel spring between top and bottom plate

and shall include a top bolt for leveling or anchoring and a bottom plate with a minimum of two mounting holes and shall be permanently bonded to a 1/4" thick ribbed neoprene noise stop pad.

2. Type HS, housed spring mount same as Type S except spring located between telescoping steel

housings; include resilient inserts to separate and guide telescoping parts.

3. Type VRS, vertically restrained spring mount same as Type S except it shall have vertical restraining bolts to limit movement; Design so limit stops are out of contact during normal operation.

4. Type RM, resilient mount, shall be fiberglass, precompressed, inorganic, inert and coated with a

flexible elastomeric moisture barriers or neoprene-in-shear having a steel top and bottom plate imbedded in or bonded to the resilient material; isolator shall incorporate a top hold down bolt or tapped hole for anchoring equipment; bottom plate shall have a minimum of two mounting holes for anchoring to floor or equipment pad.

5. Type EP, equipment pads, shall be fiberglass, a minimum of 1" thick; a steel load plate shall be

bonded to top of pad, if equipment base does not provide a uniform load surface.




6. Type TR, thrust restraints, consisting of spring element in series with fiberglass or neoprene

pad. Design so thrust restraint can be adjusted in the field. Attach thrust restraints, at centerline of thrust and symmetrically on either side of unit duct connection.

2.4. ACOUSTICAL SEALS: Provide acoustical seals at walls, ceilings, and floor openings for all resiliently

supported piping or other elements connected to isolated moving equipment. In addition, all other conduit, piping and duct penetrations into adjacent spaces or chases shall be sealed to minimize the transmission of airborne sound. The seal shall be comprised of flexible fiberglass or mineral wool backing material and a 1/4" thick layer of silicone sealant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION:

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and load application to vibration control materials and units. Adjust to ensure that units have equal deflection, do not bottom out under loading, and are not short-circuited by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices intended for temporary support during installation. The Contractor shall seek guidance from the local representative of the vibration control materials representative on any installation procedure with which he is unfamiliar. Provide acoustical seals around all piping, ductwork, and conduit passing through floors separating mechanical spaces and occupied areas and through full height walls surrounding meeting and conference rooms, private offices, and mechanical equipment rooms.

B. Equipment: Base-plate of spring isolators shall be anchored to the floor, equipment pad or support

rails. Anchor equipment to top plate of spring and resilient isolators if isolator has provision for anchoring or leveling. Where structural steel or concrete inertia bases are used, equipment and isolators shall be firmly anchored to the base. Minimum clearance between the base and housekeeping pad shall be not less than 1". Any field drilled anchor holes in steel rails or frames shall be re-primed prior to anchoring of equipment. Where roof curb isolators are used, equipment shall be firmly anchored to the vibration isolation curb. No rigid connections between equipment and building structure shall be made that reduces the noise and vibration control systems effectiveness. Lateral motion in excess of 1/4" during start-up and shutdown shall be restrained by lateral spring Type TR thrust restraint mountings. Electrical conduit connections to isolated equipment shall be flexible type to allow free motion of isolated equipment, shall be a minimum of 24" long and have not less than one 90º bend, and shall be installed as part of the electrical work.

Ductwork: Flexible connections shall be incorporated in the ductwork adjacent to all air moving units as part of the sheet metal work. Where total air handler discharge static pressure is 3" or greater, provide a minimum of two thrust restraints located across the flexible duct connection between the supply side of the air moving equipment and the supply ductwork. Thrust restraints shall be Type TR vibration isolators. Ductwork connected to air handling units isolated from the building structure shall be suspended on Type FGSH or Type NSH hangers for minimum distance of 10 feet from unit. Minimum deflection of the first duct isolator nearest equipment connection shall match that of the isolated equipment.

3.2. VERIFICATION: On completion of installation of all vibration control devices and seismic restraints, the local representative of the isolation material manufacturer shall inspect the completed system and report in writing to the Contractor and Architect/Engineer any installation errors, improperly selected isolation devices, or other faults in the system that could affect the performance of the system. The installing Contractor shall correct all listed faults and submit a letter to the Architect/Engineer, indicating that all corrective work has been completed.







MECHANICAL PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION 230553 - 1

SECTION 230553 - MECHANICAL PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. WORK INCLUDED, BUT NOT LIMITED TO:

A. Preparation and painting of equipment, accessories, ductwork, piping and miscellaneous materials located within mechanical equipment rooms, penthouses and other unfinished mechanical and/or utility areas. The painting of mechanical equipment and materials located outside the building shall be limited to piping, pipe supports and similar items requiring protection. Mechanical equipment and materials exposed in finished areas (including storage rooms) are not included as work of this section, except for the painting of exposed ductwork as seen through the face of a diffuser, register or grille shall be the responsibility of the mechanical subcontractor. See Architectural painting section for all painting requirements in finished areas and all equipment located outside of the building.

B. Label all piping, ductwork and equipment exposed in mechanical equipment rooms, utility areas, or

concealed above a removable ceiling system.

1.2. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Acceptable paint manufacturers, other mechanical equipment and materials requiring painting, surface preparation and application requirements:

1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturers.

B. Identification Standard: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, and

viewing angles of identification devices. Abbreviations, colorfield and text color shall be as listed in Part 3 of this specification.

1.4. SPECIAL REQUIREMENT: The cost for painting of equipment, piping and ductwork as listed in this

specification section, shall be broken out and listed as a separate line item in the Schedule of Values and labeled as Mechanical Painting. Identification of equipment, piping and ductwork and the finishing of interior duct surfaces behind diffusers, registers and grilles is not included in this breakout.

1.5. SUBMITTALS: Refer to Section 230512 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information, including paint label analysis and

application instructions for each material proposed for use. Submit color chip for all surfaces to be painted and samples of each lettering style and other graphic representation required for each identification material or system.

B. Schedules: Submit valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8-1/2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room name and number), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves which are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special "flags", in margin of schedule. In addition to mounted copy, furnish one extra copy for each Operation and Maintenance Manual. Add behind a special “Tab” labeled “Valve Schedule”.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. MANUFACTURERS:

A. Surface Painting: See PAINTING for acceptable manufacturers.

B. Identification Products: Provide products by Seton Name Plate Corp.; Allen Systems, Inc.; Brady (W. H.) Co.; Signmark Div. or Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc.

2.2. PAINTED IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS:

A. Fiberboard or metal stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizes complying with

recommendations of ANSI A13.1 for piping, but not less than 2" high letters for ductwork and 3” high letters for major equipment.

B. Stencil Paint: Exterior type stenciling enamel; black, brushing type. C. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated in "Pipe and Valve Tag

Identification Schedule" at the end of this Section.

2.3. PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS:

A. General: Comply with ANSI A13.1 and abbreviations and direction of flow matching that indicated on Mechanical Drawings and in these specifications.

B. Small Pipes: For external diameters 6” and smaller (including insulation if any), provide full-band

pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location. For snap-on application, use pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. Tape ends to pipe (or insulation) with color coded plastic (self-adhesive) tape matching color field. Tape shall be not less than 1" wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, overlap tape a minimum of 6 inches.

C. Large Pipes: For external diameters larger than 6” (including insulation if any), provide either full-

band or strip-type pipe markers, but not narrower than 3 times letter height, and of the required length. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker shall be taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 1-1/2" wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, overlap tape a minimum of 6 inches.

D. Markings: Comply with piping system nomenclature indicated on Contract Mechanical Drawings

and in Part 3 of this specification section. Print each pipe marker with an integral arrow, indicating direction of flow or use color-coded tape matching color field at ends of marker with direction of flow arrows imprinted on tape.

2.4. PLASTIC TAPE: Manufacturer's standard color-coded pressure-sensitive (self-adhesive) vinyl tape, not

less than 3 mils thick and width as required above. 2.5. VALVE TAGS:

A. Brass Valve Tags: Minimum 20 gauge polished brass valve tags, 1-1/2" diameter, with stamp-engraved piping system abbreviation legend with 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2" high, and with 3/16" top hole for fastener.




B. Valve Tag Fasteners: Solid brass jack chain, of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose. In lieu of jack chain fasteners, copper or monel meter seal wire and seal pads may be used to attach valve tags.

C. Access Panel Markers: Provide 1/16" thick engraved plastic laminated access panel markers, with

abbreviations and numbers corresponding to concealed valve. Marker shall be white with black core.

2.6. VALVE SCHEDULE FRAMES: For each page of valve schedule, provide 8-1/2” x 11” glazed display

frame, with screws for removable mounting on building walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood, rigid plastic or extruded aluminum, with SSB-grade sheet glass.

2.7. ENGRAVED PLASTIC-LAMINATE SIGNS:

A. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, in the sizes and thicknesses indicated,

engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes indicated, white with black core, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate.

B. Thickness: 1/16" or 1/8" as determined by the engraver.

C. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive where

screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate. 2.8. LETTERING AND GRAPHICS: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in

mechanical identification work, with corresponding designations shown on mechanical drawings. Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and specified, provide identification which indicates individual system number as well as service (i.e., CWP-3, ACU-1, AHU-5, etc.).

2.9. ACCESS MARKERS FOR ACOUSTIC TILE CEILINGS: Provide color coded brass push-pins

complete with a minimum ½” shank and 5/8” diameter head. Pin head color coding shall match the designated identification marker “color field” as indicated on the schedule at the back of this section.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

A. All metal surfaces shall be cleaned of rust, scale, dirt, etc., and wiped with mineral spirits to remove oil before applying paint. Uninsulated metal surfaces and aluminum foil jackets on insulation shall be primed with one coat of zinc chromate primer. Canvas and paper insulation jackets shall be primed with one coat of flat wall primer. Where equipment is furnished with factory prime coat, only patch priming of damaged areas is required. Galvanized surfaces shall be pre-treated with crystalline zinc phosphate prior to applying finished coats.

B. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering

or finish, including valve tags, install all identification after completion of such work. Install pipe, duct and equipment identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.

3.2. FINISH PAINTING:




A. General: Paint all exposed surfaces on mechanical equipment, ductwork, ferrous piping, etc. located in mechanical equipment rooms except as indicated below. (On existing facilities, where the Owner already has a pre-established equipment finish and color system in use, the following shall be superseded by the Owner's current standards if so directed by the Owner or Project Engineer. Coordinate finishes and identifications with Owner’s Representative.)

B. Hangers and Supports: Finish with one coat of semi-gloss rust inhibitor type black enamel (Rust-O-

Leum or equal). Painting of hangers is not required where galvanized hangers are used.

C. Ductwork: Finish sheet metal or insulated ductwork with two coats of light gray semi-gloss enamel. The interior duct surfaces behind all grilles, registers and diffusers, (in finished areas only) visible through the face of air device, shall be spray painted with one coat of flat black enamel. Where acoustic lining is installed in ductwork, the painting of interior duct surfaces behind diffusers, registers and grilles should be limited to painting the galvanized sheet metal mechanical fastener caps.

D. Piping: Finish piping or pipe insulation surfaces with two coats of light medium gray semi-gloss

enamel.

E. Equipment: Uninsulated hot surfaces (portions of boilers, steam traps, valves, converters, etc.) shall be painted with two coats of heat resistant aluminum. All other equipment surfaces shall be finished with two coats of medium blue-gray semi-gloss equipment enamel. Equipment nameplates shall not be painted. (Where equipment is finished with baked-on enamel or a minimum of 2 factory-applied finished coats, field painting of these items may be omitted upon receipt of written approval from the Architect.) All scratched or marred surfaces on factory finished equipment shall be repaired using manufacturer's touch-up paint.

3.3. IDENTIFICATION:

A. Ductwork:

1. General: Identify supply, return, exhaust, intake and relief ductwork with stenciled signs and

arrows, showing ductwork service (i.e. AHU-5 Supply) and direction of flow.

2. Location: In each space where ductwork is exposed, or concealed only by removable ceiling system, locate signs near points where ductwork originates (fan or room entrance) or continues into concealed enclosures (shaft, or similar concealment), and at 50' spacing along exposed runs. Where a duct system is contained within a single room, duct identification is not required.

3. Access Doors: Provide engraved plastic laminate signs on each access door in ductwork and

housings, indicating purpose of access. (i.e.: FIRE DAMPER; FILTER; VALVES, etc.).

B. Piping:

1. General: Install plastic or stenciled pipe markers on each system requiring identification. Include arrows to show direction of flow. Stenciled markers shall be positioned over a field painted color-coded background band (around entire pipe or pipe insulation circumference) using a contrasting lettering as indicated on the identification schedule below. Length of color field and letter size shall be as listed below:

Outside Diameter of Length of Size of




Pipe or Covering, In. Color Field, In. Lettering, In.

3/4 - 1-1/4 8 1/2 1-1/2 - 2 10 1 2-1/2 - 6 12 1-1/4

8 - 10 18 2-1/2 Over 10 24 3

2. Location: Locate pipe markers wherever piping is exposed to view in unfinished spaces,

mechanical equipment rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts and plenums) and non-concealed locations as listed below:

a. Near each valve or control device.

b. Near each branch, excluding short runouts to fixtures and terminal units; mark each pipe at

branch, where there could be question of flow pattern.

c. Near locations where pipe passes through walls or floors/ceilings, or enters non-accessible enclosures.

d. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of concealed

piping.

e. Near major equipment and other points of origination and termination.

f. Spaced at maximum of 50' along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25' in Mechanical Equipment Rooms and congested.

g. Spaced at 50’ along each piping run located above removable acoustic ceilings.

C. Valves:

1. General: Provide valve tag on every valve, and/or flow control device in each piping system;

exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose bibbs, shut-off valves at pipe risers, plumbing fixtures, HVAC terminal devices and similar rough-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List each tagged valve in valve schedule under its proper piping system (i.e., CHILLED WATER, DOMESTIC HOT WATER, ETC.) complete with valve number and purpose.

2. Mount valve tag identification schedules as directed by Owner's representative. Include one

copy of valve tag schedule in a separate marked section of each copy of the O & M Manual. 3. Access Markers: Where zone and service valves are located above acoustic ceilings, the ceiling

module to be used for primary access shall be marked using a color coded push-pin. Colors shall match the system color field designation as listed in the schedule at the end of this section.

D. Mechanical Equipment and Materials:

1. General: Locate a stenciled equipment marker on each major item of mechanical equipment,

and an engraved plastic-laminated sign on or near each operational or control device. Provide signs for the following general categories of equipment and operational or control devices:




a. Remote located meters, gauges, thermometers and similar units. b. Fuel-burning units including boilers, furnaces, water heaters, stills, absorption units and

similar units. c. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers and similar motor-driven units. d. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers evaporative coolers and similar

equipment. e. Fans, air terminal units, mixing boxes, etc. f. Packaged, central-station and zone-type air handling and energy recovery units. g. Tanks and pressure vessels. h. Humidifiers, water filter and treatment systems and other similar equipment. i. Pneumatic, electric and electronic control cabinets.

2. Lettering size of engraved plastic-laminated signs: Minimum 1" high where normal viewing sight distance is less than 6'-0", and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Major items of equipment (chillers, air handling units, energy recovery units, boilers, etc.) shall have lettering not less than 3" high. Equipment name designation shall match that shown on plans and shall distinguish between multiple units (i.e., AHU-2, CWP-5, etc.) .

3.4. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: Relocate any mechanical identification marker or sign which has

become visually blocked by piping, ductwork, or equipment and cannot be read while standing on floor. Clean all finished surfaces of paint splatter and wipe clean the face of identification devices, and glass frames of valve charts.

3.5. PIPE AND VALVE TAG IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE:

Lettering Valve Tag and

Pipe Medium Color Field Color Pipe Identification

Condensate Drain -- Black CD Natural Gas -- Black GAS Refrigerant Suction -- Black RS Refrigerant Discharge -- Black RD Refrigerant Liquid -- Black RL

NOTE:

Contractor shall review pipe and equipment identification with the Owner's representative prior to any on-site work. If the Owner already has a pre-established identification system in use, the above listed standard shall be superseded by the Owner's standard if so directed in writing by the Owner Representative, Project Mechanical Engineer or Construction Administrator.







TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING (TAB) 230593 - 1

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING (TAB) PART 1 - GENERAL

0.1. WORK INCLUDED, BUT NOT LIMITED TO: Testing, adjusting, and balancing of air and water distribution systems, and associated equipment and apparatus of mechanical work. The Work consists of setting the fan and pump speeds, and air and water volume (flow) adjustments provided for systems, recording data, conducting tests, verifying proper functioning of control devices, smoke tests (if required), preparing and submitting reports, and recommending modifications to Work as required by Contract Documents. All TAB data shall be taken and reported using IP (inch-pound) units.

0.2. TAB ENGINEER'S QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS:

A. AABC or NEBB Certified TAB Engineer: Provide services of a qualified AABC or NEBB TAB

engineer (i.e., TAB supervisor, regularly employed by an AABC or NEBB certified TAB agency). The certified TAB agency and certified TAB engineer shall be legally independent of the installing contractors and/or equipment suppliers, for this project.

. 0.3. APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: Publications listed below form a part of this specification and shall

be used as a reference and guide for work done under this Section:

A. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Handbook of Fundamentals, 2001.

B. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC), National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating,

Ventilating and Air Conditioning Systems, current edition.

C. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB), Procedural Standards for Testing-Adjusting-Balancing of Environmental Systems, current edition.

0.4. SUBMITTALS:

A. Qualifications: Submit copy of TAB engineers certificate, if certified, or biographic data on non-

certified TAB engineer who will directly supervise testing, adjusting, and balancing work on this project and a list of past TAB experience within 50 miles of this project site. Submit two copies of this data within 30 days of "Notice to Proceed”.

B. Design review report, work plan and copies of proposed TAB test and balance forms (similar or

equal to AABC, NEBB or SMACNA forms) shall be submitted for review by the Project Mechanical Engineer a minimum of 60 days prior to the commencement of on-site TAB work.

C. Final TAB Report: Upon satisfactory completion of all TAB work, all information shall be neatly

handwritten or typed and submitted with accompanying drawings (reduced scale 11" x 17" preferred) of system tested with diffusers, registers, dampers, and other test locations identified. All reports shall be 8 1/2" x 11" paper, assembled, indexed and bound in a vinyl loose-leaf notebook with project name and TAB agency's name, address and telephone number permanently printed on the front cover. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified




TAB engineer. Include documentation indicating the most recent calibration date for each item of test equipment used. Final TAB Report shall be submitted a minimum of 10 days prior to "Substantial Completion" site visit.

0.5. PREREQUISITE WORK: The following work shall be completed prior to the start of TAB work.

A. Thoroughly clean duct work of all foreign matter before connections are made to equipment. Filters

shall be cleaned or replaced just prior to final balancing.

B. Remove all trash, plaster, dust, paint spots and all foreign matter from inside and outside of all equipment, coils, plenums, etc.

C. Equipment: Flush and clean water side (or steam side) of boiler, chiller, cooling tower, unit coils,

and similar items as recommended by the respective unit manufacturer.

D. Piping: Clean all piping. Strainers shall be cleaned and start-up screens removed. Verify that chemical treatment of all closed-loop water systems has been completed and that all trapped air has been bled from the system,.

E. Complete all HVAC equipment installation, start-up and de-bugging.

0.6. SCHEDULING OF WORK: The Work shall be done as soon as possible after each system has been

completed and under full control and full load; if seasonal conditions do not permit full load testing, the final testing and balancing shall be made as required during the first reasonable full load operating conditions, as approved by the Project Mechanical Engineer. If building is occupied prior to final balancing, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for all additional expenses and coordination required. If the Owner takes early occupancy of the building (or renovated area) the Owner shall be responsible for additional expenses incurred for performance of TAB Work.

0.7. COORDINATION OF SUPPORTING PERSONNEL: The Contractor shall provide the technical

personnel, such as factory representatives, controls installer, or equipment mechanics, required by the TAB engineer to make adjustments and fully support his TAB field measurement work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

0.1. TEST PORTS: Openings required for pitot traverses shall be provided as required and shall be fitted with tight fitting, removable plastic or hard rubber snap-in type plugs for non-insulated ductwork, and extension type die-cast aluminum test ports, with gasket and screw cap with chain, for all insulated ductwork. These ports will be provided by the Mechanical Sub-Contractor and shall be installed as directed by the TAB engineer.

0.2. TEST INSTRUMENTS:

A. Utilize test instruments and equipment for TAB work required, of type, precision, and capacity as

recommended by one of the following TAB standards:

1. NEBB's Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems.




2. AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating and Air

Conditioning Systems". 3. SMACNA's "HVAC Systems – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing".

B. Calibration: Instruments used for testing and balancing must have been calibrated within the last 6

months and checked for accuracy prior to start of Work. Include latest calibration date on the submittal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

0.1. DESIGN REVIEW: TAB engineer shall carefully review project plans, specifications and approved shop drawings to verify that the air and water systems are designed in such a way that system balancing can be accomplished using the control devices shown and/or specified. If deficiencies are found in the system design which would prohibit proper adjusting and balancing, the TAB engineer shall clearly indicate in a letter to the Architect the extent of the deficiency and outline recommendations as to how to correct the situation. This information shall be submitted in sufficient time to permit corrections without delaying the project completion date. The TAB engineer shall state that no such deficiencies are evident if such is the case.

0.2. WORK PLAN: TAB engineer shall submit a work plan to describe fully the intended procedures and

TAB instrumentation to be used for the work on each system. Indicate the method of approach to the TAB work and sequencing of work. Submit a copy of proposed TAB forms as part of the work plan submittal.

0.3. PREPARATION:

A. Site Visit: The TAB engineer shall visit the project site and survey the HVAC systems installation

prior to any on site TAB work. The date of this site visit shall be coordinated with the Mechanical Subcontractor. Report, in writing to the Project Engineer, any discovered deficiencies which will directly affect the TAB work.

B. Verification: Verify that the following work has been completed prior to system testing and

balancing:

1. Air Systems: Systems shall be fully operational; all filters shall be clean; temperature and system controls shall be checked for proper operation; motors and bearings shall be properly lubricated; fan belt tension and rotation shall be checked; all required manual volume dampers have been installed; and ceilings have been installed where air-pattern adjustments are required.

2. Water Systems: A complete air balance must be accomplished before beginning the water

system test and balance; open all valves to full open position; close coil bypass stop valves; set control valves to full coil flow; remove and clean all strainers; examine water in system and determine if water has been properly cleaned and chemically treated; verify that required test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow control and balancing valves have been installed; check pump rotation; clean and set automatic fill valves for required system




pressure; check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and the system is completely full of water; check air vents at high points of water systems and determine that all air has been completely removed from system; set all temperature controls so all coils are calling for full cooling or heating; check operation of automatic bypass valves; check and set operating temperatures of chillers, boilers and converters to design requirements; verify that all motors and pump bearings are properly lubricated; verify that all required vibration isolation hangers, supports, and expansion fittings and loops have been installed where required.

0.4. AIR BALANCING:

A. Air balancing shall not be attempted until the building is fully enclosed and all associated exhaust

systems are in operation.

B. Air quantities shall be determined by the following methods with the preferred being the first, if not possible then in the order listed:

1. Supply: Traverse readings (branch or main); summation of individual supply CFM quantities;

or fan curves.

2. Return: Traverse readings, summation of individual return CFM quantities, or fan curves.

3. Outside Air: Traverse readings; by difference in supply and return CFM quantities; or by mixed air temperature. (If method 1 cannot be used then use method 2 and check by method 3 after system is balanced).

C. Air terminal units may be factory pre-set, however readings downstream should be totaled and the

air terminal unit fan speed controller (SCR) or secondary air volume damper set as necessary to match quantities listed on the plans. Contractor shall verify that recorded primary air cfm matches those listed by BMS (+/- 5%).

D. CFM or velocity measurements shall be made with a velometer or flow hood. E. Adjust all air handling equipment to within 5%, and individual diffusers and registers to within 10%

of quantities listed on plans.

F. Balance all systems at maximum total flow and minimum outside air unless diversity dictates otherwise. In such cases, the TAB engineer shall submit as part of his work plan the procedure he plans to use. Where multiple diffusers are connected to a fan-coil unit, adjust each diffuser proportionally to the total CFM available.

0.5. TAB REPORT: Submit as a minimum the following information and test data, arranged by system.

A. Equipment: Name plate and design data, manufacturer's model and serial numbers, unit number.

B. Motor: Manufacturer and model number, HP, voltage, current amps, amp range, phase, rpm,

efficiency rating, insulation class, starter size, and OL heater size.




C. Air handling, heat pump, energy recovery, makeup air or air conditioning units: Outside, supply and return air quantities (cfm) fan speed (rpm), static pressure at fan suction and discharge (in. w.g.).

D. Fans: Size, type, fan speed (rpm), air quantity (cfm), static pressure (in. w.g.).

E. Air Outlet and Inlet Devices: Types, size (in.) velocity (fpm), free area (sq. in.), and computed air

quantity (cfm). If flow hood is used only type, size and air quantity (cfm) are needed. F. Fan Coil Units (and Cabinet Heaters): The air side of free discharge units need not be tested; the

outlets on ducted unit shall be tested per air outlet requirements. Where the sum total does not match the totals indicated on the plans, divide the total air volume proportionally to that indicated. Where the total air flow exceeds that listed on the plans, reduce fan speed by one level and rebalance proportionally. Water side data shall include inlet and outlet temperatures, flow rates (gpm) and pressure drop at design flow.

0.6. PERFORMANCE DATA: After all air and water balance work is completed, set all room temperature setpoints to the recommended temperature (75°F if not instructed otherwise) and allowed to operate for a minimum of 24 hours. Check and record the actual space temperature in each room. If temperature variation is "out" more than +/- 1°F, the sensor or thermostat shall be recalibrated or replaced. All such spaces shall be rechecked and documented again 24 hours later.

Room and system temperatures may be obtained using a BMS printout of all points. All

discrepancies and deviations shall be addressed and corrected by the TAB engineer.

0.7. FINAL TEST: Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall make a final test in the presence of the Project Mechanical Engineer. With all equipment operating and all controls in automatic position, the systems and equipment specified herein shall be proven to operate safely and to heat and cool the structure uniformly. If not, adjustments and corrections shall be made until satisfactory operation is achieved. If random test show a measured flow deviation of 10 percent or more at more than 10 percent of locations checked, the TAB report will be rejected and the entire system shall be re-balanced and retested with a new report submitted at no additional cost to the Owner.

0.8. POST ACCEPTANCE TEST: Should completion of the building occur at such time that the required

performance test must be conducted and test data recorded and submitted during a season when both heating and cooling system performance cannot be checked, the Contractor shall perform the tests and record all such data as is available with system operating automatically under the prevailing weather conditions. That part of the system operation which cannot be recorded because of the prevailing weather shall be delayed until the weather is appropriate at which time the remaining part of the required tests shall be conducted and data recorded accordingly. Portions of the tests may not be delayed without written consent of the Architect.

0.9. MARKING OF CONTROL SETPOINTS: Following final acceptance of TAB report, the settings of all

adjustment devices for hydronic and air systems, including valves, dampers, and controls shall be permanently marked by the TAB engineer so that adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time in the future. Setpoints designed to be adjusted through the BMS Control System need not be marked, but shall be recorded by running a complete status printout of all control setpints and actual operating temperatures.







MECHANICAL INSULATION 230713 - 1

SECTION 230713 - MECHANICAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide UL listed, composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method. Exception: Outdoor mechanical insulation may have flame spread index of 75 and smoke developed index of 450. Exception: Industrial mechanical insulation that will not affect life safety egress of building may have flame spread index of 75 and smoke developed index of 450.

B. Standards: Insulation materials shall conform to ISO 9000 Quality Standards.

1.2. SUBMITTALS: Refer to Section 230512 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS for basic

requirements. Submit product data (including thermal conductivity, thickness, and jacket data) and written description of proposed manufacturer’s recommended installation method for each type of insulation material.

1.3. Delivery and Storage of Materials: Deliver all insulation materials to the jobsite in sealed factory

shipping wrappers, boxes and/or containers. Protect insulation against dirt, moisture, chemical and mechanical damage, before, during and after installation. Any water damaged insulation shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. MANUFACTURERS: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation products by Armstrong World Industries, Inc., CertainTeed Manson Corp., Insulation Materials Corporation of America (IMCOA), Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH., John Manville Insulation, Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp., Pittsburgh Corning Corp., Rubatex Corp., or Thermal Ceramics.

2.2. PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS (S):

A. Type FG: Fiberglass insulation, factory molded, having a maximum "K" factor of 0.23 at 75ºF

mean temperature, and minimum of 3.5 lbs. density. Vapor barrier shall be a combination of aluminum foil reinforced with glass fiber yarn mesh and laminated to flame-retardant Kraft paper having a 2 inch tab and white, pre-sized outer jacket. Manufacturers standard weight 20 mil thick PVC vapor barrier jacket will also be considered on an equality basis.

B. Type PF: Polyolefin foam insulation, maximum 1.5 lb. density, having a "K" factor of 0.24 at 75ºF

mean temperature; maximum 3% shrinkage at 200ºF; minimum 0.5% water absorption by weight; suitable for temperature limits of 0ºF to 180ºF; intended primarily for outdoor use; is UV stabilized and can be used without additional protective coatings. Insulation shall be furnished in factory-molded pipe insulation sections and may be either pre-slit with self-sealing design or non-slit type.

C. Type RPF: Rigid phenolic foam pipe insulation, chemically neutral, with a laminated aluminum foil

and white Kraft paper vapor barrier jacket having a "K" factor of 0.23 at 75ºF mean temperature and a density of 3.0 lbs./cu. ft. Comply with ASTM C 1126, Type III, Grade 1.

D. Fitting Covers: Encase pipe fitting insulation with one-piece pre-molded high impact PVC fitting

covers, fastened as per manufacturer’s recommendations. Covers shall have a fire/smoke rating of




not more than 25/50 and shall be suitable for vapor sealing when used on domestic cold water, chilled water or dual temperature water piping. Fitting covers shall be Zeston 2000 PVC by John Manville, or approved equal.

E. Finishes for Pipe Insulation Exposed to Outside Weather Conditions:

1. Types FG and CS Insulation: Encase with metal jacket of aluminum Type 3003 or 5005, 16 mil thick, flat finish (not corrugated). Supply in flat rolls for application to straight sections of pipe and in preformed fitting covers for elbows and fittings. Hem all cut edges to produce a straight seam or joint. Bands for securing metal jackets shall be aluminum 1/2 inch wide by 0.015 inch thick.

2. Type PF Insulation: no additional exterior finish is required.

F. Piping Insulation Compounds and Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, adhesives, sealers,

and protective finishes as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

2.3. DUCTWORK INSULATION MATERIALS (S):

A. Type RFG: Rigid fiberglass board type insulation; minimum 6.0 lb. density, having a maximum "K" factor of 0.23 at 75ºF mean temperature; vapor barrier shall be a combination aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass yarn mesh and laminated to flame resistant Kraft paper.

B. Type FFG: Flexible fiberglass blanket type insulation, minimum 1.0 lb. density, having a maximum

"K" factor of 0.27 compressed at 75ºF mean temperature; vapor barrier shall be combination aluminum foil reinforced with glass fiber yarn mesh and laminated to flame retardant Kraft paper having 2 inch tab.

C. Type RMF: Rigid mineral fiberboard type insulation, minimum 18 lb./cu. ft. density, having a "K"

factor of 0.38 at 70ºF mean temperature, non-combustible with flame spread, smoke developed, and fuel contributed indexes of 0, capable of withstanding temperatures in excess of 2000ºF, and a continuous service temperature of 1800ºF. Insulation shall be John Manville Super Firetemp L Board, or approved equal.

D. Ductwork Insulation Compounds and Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors,

corner angles, cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers, protective finishes and similar compounds and accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. PIPING SYSTEMS INSULATION:

A. PIPE INSULATION MINIMUM THICKNESS SCHEDULE (IN INCHES):

TEMP. INSULATION 1.5 AND 2.0 5 AND SERVICE RANGE, ºF TYPE SMALLER THRU 4 LARGER

REFRIGERANT 30-50 PF 1.0 1.5 1.5 CONDENSATE RPF DRAIN 50-75 or FG 0.5 0.5 0.5




GENERAL NOTES:

1. All insulated piping with a normal media temperature range falling below 65ºF shall be vapor

sealed.

2. Piping exposed to outside air temperatures shall have insulation thickness increased by 1/2 inch.

3. Piping located within walls or chases shall be insulated unless specifically noted otherwise.

Piping in chases or utility spaces having one or more exterior (outside) walls shall be insulated with material 1/2 inch thicker than specified for piping type.

4. Omit insulation on piping systems as indicated below:

5. Type FU insulation shall not be used in return air ceiling plenums.

6. Pipe insulation located exterior to the building (condenser and heat pump water piping,

refrigerant piping, etc.,) and exposed to direct sunlight shall be Type PF; or as a Contractor option, install Type FG with an aluminum jacket sealed watertight.

B. INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION:

1. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,

and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for intended service.

2. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to installation of heat tracing, testing, and

acceptance of tests. 3. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of

piping with full-length units of insulations, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other.

4. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Use insulation preformed to fit the diameter of

the pipe or fitting and apply in staggering positions. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.

5. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on all cold piping insulation, and protect to prevent

puncture or other damage. Seal vapor tight all joints, seams, voids, and punctures in jacket and all exposed edges of insulation materials. On circulated chilled water piping, vapor seal end joints of insulation every 20 feet using Foster 30-35 sealant or equal to prevent moisture from migrating beyond a single section of insulation.

6. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and

composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job fabricated units except where specific form or type is indicated. Insulate removable portions of valves, strainers, etc. in a manner to allow the removable parts to be removed for servicing without disturbing the insulated body.




7. On hot piping, terminate insulation neatly at unions and flanges. Bevel and seal exposed and/or cut edges of insulation material.

8. On cold piping, terminate insulation one inch each side of unions and flanges. Secure larger

size of removable sections of insulation over the flanges or union and lap over the pipe insulation not less than 3 inches each side of pipe insulation termination point and vapor seal. Insulate and vapor seal expansion compensators with Type FU insulation. Pipe anchors directly connected to the piping shall be insulated a minimum distance of 12 inches up the anchor support bracing using Type FU or FG insulation. Pipe guides shall be pre-insulated type with insulation value of support core to match surrounding piping insulation. Condenser water piping used as part of a “free cooling” system, both inside and outside of the building, shall be insulated as specified for chilled water piping.

9. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping

penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. Where piping penetrates a fire-rated wall, it shall be installed in strict accordance with the assigned UL test assembly for exact conditions encountered. Fire caulk all voids between piping and wall surface. See Architectural plans for UL test assembly numbers.

10. Install hangers on the outside of insulation. Install a 16 gauge sheet steel insulation protection

shield around the lower one-half circumference of the insulation. Where non-rigid insulation (Type FG, PF and FU) is used on pipes 1 1/2 inches and larger, provide a rigid pipe insulation insert section (calcium silicate or equal) a minimum of 12 inches long for piping up to 6” diameter and 22” long for larger piping, complete with protection shield, and of the same thickness, finish, and jacket characteristics as the adjacent insulation. Preinsulated pipe support hanger assembly may also be used.

11. Refrigerant Piping: Insulate all valves, fittings, accessories, and tubing. Butt all edges, seams,

and joints tightly together and vapor seal.

3.2. DUCTWORK SYSTEMS INSULATION:

A. DUCT INSULATION THICKNESS SCHEDULE:

SERVICE TYPE THICKNESS (IN) REMARKS

OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE RFG 2.0 --

SUPPLY (HEATING & COOLING): CONCEALED FFG 1.5 -- EXPOSED RFG 1.0 --

DUCT EXPOSED TO WEATHER RMF 3.0 NOTE 1

GENERAL NOTES:

1. Insulate supply ductwork exposed to outside weather conditions using the same type of insulation as specified for indoors except 1/2" additional thickness. Protect insulation with 26-gauge galvanized sheet metal jacket, sealed weathertight and counterflashed over roof curb or wall opening. (As a Contractor option, other ductwork weather-proofing systems may be considered.)




B. INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION:

1. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose.

2. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces.

3. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure

complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.

4. Maintain integrity of vapor barrier on all cold air ductwork insulation, and protect it to prevent puncture and other damage. All seams and joints shall be fully sealed vapor tight.

5. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar ductwork

penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. 6. Semi-rigid duct insulation board shall be attached to ductwork using stick pins and caps. Trim

all pins. Vapor seal all seams, joints, pin penetrations and voids in vapor barrier surface.

7. Duct insulation at fire-rated partition shall be terminated as near as possible to fire damper sleeve mounting angle; seal vapor barrier jacket on all ducts carrying cold air to mounting angle with Foster 30-35 sealant.

3.3. EXISTING INSULATION REPAIR: Repair or replace existing mechanical insulation damaged or

removed during this construction period to match the requirements of new work. Use insulation of same thickness as existing insulation and install new jacket lapped and sealed over existing.

3.4. PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT:

A. Insulation installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation work during

construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration. All damaged work shall be repaired.

B. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated materials.




AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SYSTEMS 230923 - 1

SECTION 230923 - AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. Furnish and install the system of Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC), as shown on the Contract Drawings and hereinafter specified, for a complete and functioning system. Installation shall be by the controls system supplier to provide single-source responsibility. All components shall completely integrate with the existing Roanoke City Schools Trane Summit and the building Tracer SC or Mitsubishi TG2000 controls systems as applicable. The existing Trane building Tracer system shall be updated from a Tracer 100 system to a Tracer SC system.

B. Temperature control sequences are specified in this section. Control diagrams are indicated on the

Drawings.

C. Refer to other Division 23 Sections for installation of instrument wells, valve bodies, and duct mounted dampers in mechanical systems; not work of this section.

D. Refer to Division 26 sections for power supply wiring to power connection on controllers and/or

unit control panels. Where wiring is used for both power and control it shall be considered to be power wiring.

E. Provide the following electrical work, including conduit, as work of this section, but complying

with all requirements of Division-26 sections:

1. Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and unit control panels.

2. Interlock wiring between electrically-operated equipment units, and between equipment and field-installed control devices.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of control equipment, of

types and sizes indicated.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms specializing and experienced in control system installations for not less than three years.

C. Codes and Standards:

1. Electrical Standards: Provide electrical products which have been tested, listed and labeled by

UL and comply with NEMA standards.

2. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" where applicable to materials, controls and control sequences.

1.3. SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each control device furnished, indicating dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, and finishes




of materials. Include installation, start-up, and maintenance instructions, and spare parts list in the O/M Manual.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each control system, containing the following

information:

1. Schematic flow diagram of system showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, control devices, and sensors with pictorial representation showing location of all components.

2. Label each control device with setting or adjustable range of control.

3. Indicate all required electrical wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that

are factory- installed and portions to be field-installed.

4. Provide details of faces of control panels, including controls, instruments, and labeling.

5. Include written description of sequence of operation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. MANUFACTURERS: Provide Automatic Temperature Controls by Trane Company.

2.2. GENERAL: Provide control products in sizes and capacities indicated, and as required to provide the specified sequence of operation, consisting of valves, dampers, thermostats, clocks, sensors, controllers, and other components as required for a complete installation. Provide control systems of the pneumatic, electric, electronic, or direct digital control (DDC) type, or any combination thereof. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard control system components as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer. Select products which are coordinated with the specific application to provide smooth and accurate operation of the control system over the entire operating range. Provide control systems with following functional and construction features as indicated.

2.3. DAMPERS: Provide automatic control dampers as indicated, with damper frames not less than formed

12-gauge galvanized steel. Provide mounting holes for enclosed duct mounting. Provide damper blades not less than 16-gauge galvanized steel, with maximum blade width of 8". Provide parallel blade design for 2-position control and opposed blade design for flow control and modulating control service. Equip dampers with actuators, with proper rating for each application.

A. Secure blades to 1/2" diameter zinc-plated axles using zinc- plated hardware. Seal off against spring

stainless steel blade bearings. Provide blade bearings of nylon and provide thrust bearings at each end of every blade. Construct blade linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass. Submit leakage and flow characteristics, plus size schedule for controlled dampers.

B. Operating Temperature Range: From -20 degrees to 200 degrees F.

C. For standard duct mounted control applications as indicated, provide with closed-cell neoprene

edging. D. All outside air dampers shall be low leakage type provided with end seals and blade edging, or

replaceable rubber seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4" wg when damper is being held by torque of 50 inch-pounds.




2.4. DAMPER AND VALVE ACTUATORS: Size each actuator to operate dampers or valves with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or 2-position action as specified. Provide actuators which shall fail safe upon loss of power in the normally open or normally closed position as indicated or required by application.

A. Electric/Electronic:

1. Provide spring-return motors, as required by operational sequence, with integral spiral-spring

mechanism. Furnish entire spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.

2. Equip motors for outdoor locations and for outside air intakes with "O ring" gaskets designed

to make motors completely weatherproof. Provide motors which permit normal operation to -40 degrees F.

3. Furnish non-spring return motors for dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., and for valves larger than

2-1/2", sized for running torque rating of 150 inch-pounds, and breakaway torque rating of 300 inch-pounds. Size spring-return motors for running torque rating of 50 inch-pounds, and breakaway torque rating of 200 inch-pounds.

B. Pneumatic: Provide piston or diaphragm type actuators with spring return for fail safe operation as

required by sequence of operation. Where more than two actuators are to be operated in sequence to each other, provide position feedback positive positioners with adjustable start point and operating range.

2.5. ROOM THERMOSTATS: Provide room sensors or thermostats with locking covers, and with

concealed adjustment devices and dead band.

A. Electronic Thermostats: Provide room thermostats of fully proportional, variable voltage output, type with adjustable throttling range and setpoint. Provide single or dual temperature, direct acting or reverse acting thermostats as specified for sequence of operations.

2.6 DUCTS SMOKE DETECTORS: Provide Simplex Type 2098-9649 duct smoke detectors. Duct smoke

detectors shall be of the solid state photoelectric type and shall be designed to ignore invisible airborne particles or smoke densities that are below the factory set alarm point. No radioactive materials shall be used. Detector construction shall be of the split type, that is, mounting base with twist-lock detailing head. Contacts between the base and head shall be of the bifurcated type using spring-type, self-wiping contacts. Removal of the detector head shall interrupt the existing supervisory circuit of the fire alarm detection loop and cause a trouble signal at the existing Fire Alarm control panel. Detector design shall provide full solid state construction and capability with other normally open fire alarm detection loop devices, (pull stations, etc.). Duct housing couplings shall be slotted to insure proper alignment of the sampling tubes. Detector shall have an alarm LED visible through a transparent front cover. Detectors shall obtain their operating power from the existing supervised current in the fire alarm loop. Provide Simplex Type 2098-9805 remote alarm/power LED indicator and key test switch.

2.7. SENSORS: Provide temperature, relative humidity, and pressure sensors of linear output type, which

are vibration and corrosion-resistant, and of wall mounted immersion, duct mounting, averaging or bulb type and with range as indicated or required for application. Provide electronic sensors of the supersensitive resistance type.

2.8. CONTROLLERS:




A. Direct Digital Control (DDC): Provide direct digital controllers of microprocessor, stand-alone

control type. The controller shall be capable of interfacing with other DDC controllers as part of a distributed control network and with a supervisory computer providing communication, monitoring, and energy management control capabilities. The controller shall utilize proportional plus integral (PI) and/or proportional-integral-derivative (PID) control algorithm to minimize offset and maintain tighter control to setpoint. The controller shall accept analog or binary inputs and provide proportional analog or two position binary controlling outputs. The controller shall permit user adjustment of control setpoints, deadbands, proportional bands, and other system operational limits. Provide a portable, hand held or integral user interface device to permit monitoring and re-setting of system control setpoints, controlled device positions, and error messages. Where pneumatic controlled devices are used, provide electronic to pneumatic transducers as required.

2.9. INDICATING GAUGES: Provide panel mounted temperature, humidity, and pressure gauges for each

sensor as indicated. Gauges shall have dial type indicators with minimum 3-1/2" face dial. Provide scale range and units suitable for intended service. Accuracy shall be plus or minus two percent of scale range.

2.10. SUPPLEMENTARY CONTROL DEVICES: Provide all supplementary devices as required for

system operation, including, but not limited to manual selector switches, relays, step controllers, pneumatic-electric switches, electric-pneumatic switches, transducers, interface devices, transformers, etc.

2.11. CONTROL PANELS: Provide control panels with suitable brackets for either wall or floor

mounting, for each control system. Locate panel adjacent to systems served.

A. Fabricate panels of 14-ga furniture-quality steel, or 6063-T5 extruded aluminum alloy, totally enclosed, with hinged doors and keyed lock, with manufacturer's standard shop-painted finish and color. Provide UL-listed cabinets for use with line voltage devices.

B. Sub-panel Mounted Equipment: Include temperature and humidity controllers, relays and automatic

switches, except exclude low-temperature protection thermostats, firestats, and other devices excluded in sequence of operation. Fasten devices with adjustments accessible through front of panels.

C. Door-Mounted Equipment: Flush-mount (on hinged door) manual switches, including damper

"minimum-off" positioning switches, "summer-winter" switches, and "manual-automatic" switches; and including dial thermometers.

D. Graphics: Where specified, provide color-coded graphic laminated plastic displays on doors, to

schematically show system being controlled. Provide protective sheet of clear plastic bonded to entire door to prevent damage to symbols.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION:

A. General: Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and roughing-in drawings, and details on drawings. Install electrical components and use electrical products complying with requirements of applicable Division-26 sections of these specifications. Mount controllers at convenient locations and heights.




B. Control Wiring: Provide wire, conduit and miscellaneous materials as required for mounting and connecting electric and electronic control devices.

1. Install control wiring, without splices between terminal points, color-coded. Install in neat

workmanlike manner, securely fastened. Install in accordance with National Electrical Code.

2. Install circuits over 25-volt with color-coded wire sized per NEC and installed in electric metallic tubing or conduit.

3. Install circuits under 25-volt with color-coded No. 18 wire with 0.031" high temperature

plastic insulation on each conductor and plastic sheath overall.

4. Install electronic circuits with color-coded No. 20 wire with 0.023" polyethylene insulation on each conductor with plastic-jacketed copper shield over all.

5. Install low voltage circuits, located in concrete slabs and masonry walls, or exposed in

occupied areas, in electrical conduit.

6. Conceal wiring except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed. Provide multiconductor instrument harness (bundle) in place of single conductors where number of conductors can be run along common path. Fasten flexible conductors bridging cabinets and doors, neatly along hinge side, and protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors neatly.

7. Number-code or color-code conductors, excluding those used for local individual room

controls, appropriately for future identification and servicing of control system.

C. Unit-Mounted Equipment: Where control devices are indicated to be unit-mounted, ship relays, switches, valves, dampers, and damper motors to unit manufacturer for mounting and wiring at factory.

D. Room Thermostats and Humidistats: Mount on walls or columns as indicated at 5'-0" above

finished floor. Align vertically with light switches.

E. Nameplates: Provide plastic laminated nameplates as specified in Section 15190, "MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION" to identify control panels and gauges and switches on control panels.

F. Outside Locations: All control devices located on the outside building walls, overhangs, etc. shall

be approved by the Architect in writing prior to installation.

3.2. INSTALLATION OF DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS:

A. Install and wire duct smoke detectors in accordance with NFPA 90A. B. Mount remote alarm lamp/key switch for duct-type smoke detector on wall

closest to detector location (coordinated with other equipment in the room) and 5'-0" above finished floor, roof or walkway. Label device plate with name of mechanical equipment served.

C. Field Quality Control:

1. Furnish the services of an authorized, factory-trained representative to provide technical assistance throughout the installation and for final testing and checkout of the additional




smoke detectors to be added to the existing system operation. Certify in writing that the system is operational and in accordance with these specifications.

2. Work consists of additions or extensions to an existing Simplex fire alarm system, prior to

starting work, establish that existing system is in proper working order. If condition exists which prevents normal operation of specified additions and extensions, notify Architect prior to doing work affecting existing system. Where work is done without such notification, it is assumed that connections have been made to a working system, and performance requirements and guarantee will apply to entire system.

3. Prior to final acceptance of system, manufacturer of system shall, in presence of Contractor, Owner's representative, Architect's representative, and local Fire Marshall, test selected duct detectors as directed by the Architect's representative pr Fire Marshall's representative.

4. Prior to above test, submit written certification from authority having jurisdiction that each

new de3vice and the complete system has been tested and approved for the use for which it is intended. The test shall be in accordance with the procedures outlined in NFPA 72H.

5. Submit copy of test results in duplicate, after signed by Owner's representative, to Architect,

Owner, Owner's Insurance Company and local Fire Protection Authority.

3.3. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION: Provide the sequence of operation for each control system as described on the drawings.

3.4. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:

A. Start-Up: Start-up, test, and adjust control systems in presence of manufacturer's authorized

representative. Demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with

manufacturer's touch-up paint.

C. Final Adjustment: After completion of installation, adjust thermostats, control valves, motors and similar equipment provided as work of this section. Final adjustment shall be performed by specially trained personnel in direct employ of manufacturer of primary temperature control system.

3.5. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES: Provide services of manufacturer's technical representative to fully

instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of automatic temperature control systems. Schedule instruction with Owner, provide at least 7-day prior notice to Contractor and Engineer of training date. On-site training shall be not less than the equivalent of three eight-hour days.

3.6. WARRANTY AND SERVICE: All ACT/BMS devices shall be warranted to be free from defects in

workmanship and material for a period of one year from the date of substantial completion of the project, or the beneficial use by the Owner, whichever is latest.




NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS 231123 - 1

SECTION 231123 - NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. WORK INCLUDED, BUT NOT LIMITED TO: All piping and materials for natural gas system on building side. This Section includes only specialty items common to natural gas systems.

1.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE/CODES AND STANDARDS: Comply with applicable portions of

International Mechanical Code pertaining to the installation of natural gas system.

A. ANSI Compliance: Fabricate and install natural gas piping in accordance with ANSI Z223.1 ”Natural Fuel Gas Code”.

B. Utility Compliance: Fabricate and install natural gas systems in accordance with local gas utility

company guidelines and requirements.

1.3. PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Gas System Pressure: One pressure range. 0.5 psig or less.

B. Design values of fuel gas supplied for these systems are as follows:

1. Nominal Heating value: 1000 Btu/cu. ft.

2. Nominal Specific Gravity: 0.6.

3. Nominal Heating Value: 2675 Btu/cu. ft.

4. Nominal Specific Gravity: 1.6. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials use in natural gas systems. Where more than one type of materials or products are indicated, selection is Installer's option.

2.2. CORRUGATED, STAINLESS-STEEL TUBING SYSTEMS

A. Description: Comply with AGA LC 1 and include the following:

1. Tubing: Corrugated stainless steel with plastic jacket or coating. 2. Fitting: Copper Alloy with ends made to fit corrugated tubing. Include ends with threads

according to ASME B1.20.1 if connection to threaded pipe or fittings is required. 3. Striker Plates: Steel, designed to protect tubing from penetrations.




4. Manifolds: Malleable iron or steel with protective coating. Include threaded connections according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe inlet and corrugated tubing outlets.

2.3. PIPES, TUBES, FITTINGS, AND JOINING MATERIALS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; Type E or S; Grade B; Schedule 40; black.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.

2. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and

threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.

3. Cast-Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125.

4. Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel or ASME B16.11, forged steel.

5. Steel Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.11, forged steel with threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.

6. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

7. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.

8. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for natural gas.

B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) water tube, drawn temper.

1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper, streamlined pattern. 2. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Silver Classification BAg-1. Filler metal containing

phosphorus is prohibited.

3. Bronze Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.24, Class 150.

4. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for natural gas.

C. Soft Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), water tube, annealed temper.



D. Tin-Lined Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, seamless, annealed, with interior tin-plated lining.



E. Transition Fittings: Type, material, and end connections to match piping being joined.




F. Common Joining Materials: Refer to Division 23 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and

Methods” for joining materials not in the Section.

2.2 PROTECTIVE COATING

A. Furnish pipe and fittings with factory-applied, corrosion-resistant polyethylene coating for use in corrosive atmosphere.

2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24, copper alloy.

B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: ANSI Z21.41, convenience outlets and matching plug connector.

2.4 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads. B. Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel flanges

and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.

C. Appliance Connector Valves: ANSI Z21.15 and IAS listed. D. Gas Stops: Bronze body with AGA stamp, plug type with bronze plug and flat or square head, ball

type with chrome-plated brass ball and lever handle, or butterfly valve with stainless-steel disc and fluorocarbon elastomer seal and lever handle; 2-psig (13.8-kPa) minimum pressure rating.

E. Gas Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: ASME B16.33 and IAS-listed bronze body with 125-

psig (860-kPA) pressure rating.

1. Tamperproof Feature: Include design for locking.

F. Plug Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: ASME B16.38 and MSS SP-78 cast-iron, lubricated plug valves, with 125-psig (860-kPA) pressure rating. 1. Tamperproof Feature: Include design for locking.

G. General-Duty Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: ASME B16.38, cast-iron body, suitable for

fuel gas service, with “WOG” indicated on valve body, and 125-psig (860-kPA) pressure rating.

1. Gate Valves: MSS SP-70, OS&Y type with solid wedge. 2. Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67, lug type with lever handle.

2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. Description: Single stage and suitable for fuel gas service. Include steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components, elevation compensator, and atmospheric vent.

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.




2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel flanges and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.

3. Service Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.80. Include 100-psig minimum inlet pressure

rating. 4. Appliance Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18. Regulator may include vent limiting device,

instead of vent connection, if approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Pressure Regulator Vents: Factory or field-installed, corrosion-resistant screen in opening if not connected to vent piping.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 GAS SERVICE

A. Arrange with Utility Company to provide gas service to indicated location. Consult with Utility as to extent of its work, costs, fees and permits involved. Pay all costs and fees assessed by local utility for connection and installation of gas service, meter and regulator.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off fuel gas to premises or section of piping. Perform leakage test as specified in “Field Quality Control” Article to determine that all equipment is turned off in affected piping section.

B. Comply with ANSI Z223.1, “Prevention of Accidental Ignition” Paragraph.

3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Flanges, unions, transition, and special fittings with pressure ratings same as or higher than system pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fuel Gas Piping, 0.5 psig (3.45 kPA) or Less: Use the following:

1. NPS 1/2 *DN 15) and Smaller: NPS 3/4 (DN 20) steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.

2. NPS 1.2 (DN 15) and Smaller: Hard copper tube, copper fittings, and brazed joints.

a. Option: Soft copper tube, copper fittings, and brazed joints may be used for runouts at

individual appliances.

3. NPS 1/2 (DN 15) and Smaller: Tin-lined copper tube, copper fittings, and brazed joints.

4. NPS 1/2 (DN 15) and Smaller: Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing system and threaded joints.

5. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1 (DN 20 and 25): Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and

threaded joints.

6. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1 (DN 20 and 25): Hard copper tube, copper fittings, and brazed joints.




a. Option: Soft copper tube, copper fittings, and brazed joints may be used for runouts at

individual appliances.

7. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1 (DN 20 and 25): Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing system and threaded joints.

8. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1 (DN 32 to DN 50): Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and

threaded joints.

9. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2 (DN 32 to DN 50): Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints.

10. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and

threaded joints.

11. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints.

12. Larger Than NPS 4 (DN 100): Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints.

3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include

outlets of service meters. Locate where readily accessible for cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate would be subject to freezing.

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.

Use minimum-length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long, and same size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for removal of plug or cap.

B. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or

floors, and in floor channels, unless indicated to be exposed to view. C. Install fuel gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent slope upward toward risers.

D. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side

down.

E. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

F. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.

G. Install corrugated, stainless-steel tubing system according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Include striker plates to protect tubing from puncture where tubing is restrained and cannot move.

H. Install strainer on inlet of each line pressure regulator and automatic and electrically operated

regulator.




I. Install pressure gage downstream from each line pressure regulator.

J. Install flanges on valves, specialties, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger

connections.

K. Install vent piping for gas pressure regulators and gas trains, extend outside building, and vent to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant insect screens in large end.

L. Install containment conduits for gas piping below slabs, within building, in gastight conduits

extending minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) outside building, and vented to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant insect screens in large end. Prepare and paint outside of conduits with coal-tar, epoxy-polyamide paint according to SSPC-Paint 16.

3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Use materials suitable for fuel gas.

1. Brazed Joints: Make with brazing alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F (540 deg C). Brazing alloys containing phosphorus are prohibited.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches (2438 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8

inch (10mm). 2. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): Maximum span, 108 inches (2743 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10

mm). 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): Maximum span, 108 inches (2743 mm);

minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod

size, 1/2 inch (13 mm). 5. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Larger: maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 5/8 inch (16

mm).

B. Install hangers for horizontal hard copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/8 (DN 10): Maximum span, 48 inches (1219 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch

(10 mm). 2. NPS 1/2 and NPS 5/8 (DN 15 and DN 18): Maximum span, 72 inches (1829 mm);

minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).




3. NPS 3/4 and NPS 7/8 (DN 20 and DN 22): Maximum span, 84 inches (2134 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).

4. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 96 inches (2438 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10

mm).

C. Install hangers for horizontal corrugated, stainless-steel tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2 (DN 10 and DN 15): Maximum span, 48 inches (1219 mm);

minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 2. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1 (DN 20 and DN 25): Maximum span, 72 inches (1829 mm);

minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 3. Option: Support tubing from structure according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of fuel gas piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to appliances using gas with shutoff valves and unions. Install valve upstream

from and within 72 inches (1800 mm) of each appliance. Install union downstream from valve.

D. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom top form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance using gas.

E. Ground Equipments.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

2. Do not use gas pipe as grounding electrode.


A. Inspect, test, and purge piping according to ANSIZ223.1, Part 4 “Inspection, Testing, and Purging”, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory results are

obtained. C. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Verify capacities and pressure ratings of service meters, pressure regulators, valves, and

specialties.

E. Verify correct pressure settings for pressure regulators.




F. Verify that specified piping tests are complete.

3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and safety devices.




BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS 232113 - 1

SECTION 232113 - BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. WORK INCLUDED, BUT NOT LIMITED TO: All piping and materials for roof areas and building interior to a point 5 feet beyond building foundation, unless noted otherwise. This Section includes only those items which are common to more than one piping system specified in Division 23. Specialty items which are used in a single system will be specified in that particular section. Individual requirements outlined in Division 23 sub-sections shall over-ride the general guidelines listed in this section.

1.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE/CODES AND STANDARDS:

A. Welding: Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASME B31.1, or

ASME B31.9, as applicable, for shop and project site welding of piping work.

B. Brazing: Certify brazing procedures, brazers, and operators in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel code, Section IX, for shop and job-site brazing of piping.

C. Manufacturers' Standardization Society (MSS) Compliance: Provide pipe hangers and supports of

which materials, design, and manufacture comply with MSS SP-58. Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-89. Terminology used in this section is defined in MSS SP-90.

D. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI B31.1 Power Piping.

1.3. SUBMITTALS: See Section 230512 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS for submittal

requirements. A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions, and

dimensioned drawings for each type of valve, expansion compensator, gauge, support and piping specialty. Include pressure drop chart for each type and size of valve and strainer. Include scale range for each gauge.

B. Welding and Brazing Certificates: Submit written proof of each pipefitter's qualifications in

conformance with the above referenced codes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS

A. General:

1. Piping Materials: Provide piping and tubing of type, joint type, grade, size and weight indicated for each service, where type, grade or class is not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer for installation requirements, and comply with governing regulations, codes, and industry standards.

2. Fittings: Provide factory-fabricated fittings of type, materials, grade, class and pressure rating

indicated for each service and pipe size. Matching pipe, tube, valve or equipment connection in each case. Where not otherwise indicated, comply with governing regulations, codes, and




industry standards for selections, and with pipe manufacturer's recommendations where applicable.

B. Pipes and Pipe Fittings:

1. Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A120 or A106. 2. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A120. 3. Cast-Iron Pipe: ASTM A74. 4. Stainless Steel Pipe: ASTM A312. 5. Cast-Iron Flanged Fittings: ANSI B16.1, including bolting. 6. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.4. 7. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3; plain or galvanized. 8. Malleable-Iron Threaded Unions: ANSI B16.39, plain or galvanized. 9. Threaded Pipe Plugs: ANSI B16.14, plain or galvanized. 10. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolting and gasketing material for butt welded

end connection and raised facing. 11. Forged-Steel Socket-Welding and Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.11, except MSS SP-79 for

threaded reducer inserts. 12. Wrought-Steel Butt Welding Fittings: ANSI B16.9, except ANSI B16.28 for short-radius

elbows and returns. 13. Cast-Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.12. 14. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not use less

than Schedule 80 pipe where unthreaded length is less than 1-1/2", and where pipe size is less than 1-1/2. Do not thread nipples full length (no close-nipples).

C. Tube and Fittings:

1. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88; Type (wall thickness) as indicated for each service; hard-drawn

temper, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.18. 3. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22. 4. Cast-Copper Flared Tube Fittings: ANSI B16.26. 5. Copper-Tube Unions: Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for service

indicated.




D. Mechanical Piping System(S): As an installer option, mechanical roll grooved pipe couplings and fittings may be used for water piping systems having a physical size between 3" and 24" diameter, as applicable, and operating conditions not exceeding 230ºF (110ºC), in lieu of soldered, welded, flanged, or threaded methods, and may also be used as unions, seismic joints, expansion joints, expansion compensators, or vibration reducers. Smaller piping systems, 3/4" to 2" diameter, may be schedule 5 (0.049” wall) piping with mechanical rolled or pressed fittings, or equal. Domestic water systems shall be all copper or 316 stainless steel. Non-potable systems shall be carbon or 316 stainless steel or copper. Provide mechanical piping systems by Victaulic Co. of America, or approved equal.

E. Permanent Push-to-Connect Piping System (S) (Contractor’s Option): In lieu of copper piping with

soldered or brazed joints, the Contractor may choose to use a system of permanent push-to-connect fittings, valves, flanges, and specialty adaptors. Tubing shall be ASTM B88 Type K or L copper. Push-to-connect connectors shall be wrought or cast copper alloy complete with EPDM seal and 301 stainless steel internal locking ring. System shall be suitable for water service from 40-210°F. Valves shall be similar to those specified here-in-after. Contractor shall prep piping and provide system installations in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Piping connection system shall be NVent PermaLynx by Nibco/ Victaulic Enterprise.

F. Mechanically Formed Tee Connections and Coupling(S) (Contractor Option):

1. Mechanically extracted collars shall be formed in a continuous operation consisting of drilling pilot hole and drawing out the tube surface to form a collar having a height of not less than three times the thickness of the tube wall. The collaring device shall be fully adjustable as to insure proper tolerance and complete uniformity of the joint. The branch shall be notched to conform with the inner curve of the run tube and dimpled to insure penetration of the branch tube into the collar is of sufficient depth for brazing and that the branch tube does not obstruct the flow in the main line tube. All joints shall be brazed in accordance with the Copper Development Association Copper Tube Handbook using B-Cup series filler metal

2. In lieu of providing couplings in copper tubing, Installer may, as an option, provide mechanically formed couplings, provided they are in accordance with the following:

a. Form couplings by first annealing area at end of tube where expansion will occur. Insert

tube expander to die size required and expand tube end to accept tubing of same size. b. Resulting joint is minimum of 5 times as long as thickness of tube, and brazed using B-

Cup series filler metal.

3. Provide and install mechanically formed tee connections and couplings by T-Drill Corporation, Norcross, Georgia, or approved equal. Copper press fittings by Rigid Tool Company will also be considered on an equality basis.

G. Miscellaneous Piping Materials/Products:

1. Welding Materials: Provide welding materials to comply with installation requirements and

Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials. 2. Soldering Materials: Tin-Antimony Solder ASTM B 32, Grade 95TS.




3. Brazing Materials: Provide brazing materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements and Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler metal materials.

4. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised-face for

steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2. VALVES (S) (O/M):

A. General: Provide valves for service indicated. Type, pressure rating and end connections shall be suitable for piping system in which it is installed. Valves shall be of same size as upstream pipe size. Valves for domestic water service shall be all copper, brass, bronze or stainless steel. All brass and bronze valves shall be less than 15% zinc. Provide malleable iron hand wheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter-turn type. Provide detachable tee or lever handle for quarter-turn valves, 6" and smaller. Provide gear operators for valves 8" and larger. Valves in piping systems with thermal insulation shall have extended stems as required to clear insulation and jacket, and permit sealing of vapor barrier.

B. Gate Valves: Valves 2-1/2" and smaller shall be Class 125, bronze, screw-in bonnet, rising stem,

solid wedge, threaded or soldered ends. Valves 3" and larger shall be flanged ends, class 125, iron body, bolted bonnet, solid wedge, bronze-mounted. Provide gate valves by Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc., NIBCO, Inc.; Stockham Valves and Fittings or Watts Regulator.

C. Globe Valves: Valves 2" and smaller shall be Class 125, bronze body, screw-in bonnet, integral

seat, renewable disc, threaded or soldered ends. Valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be Class 125, bronze or cast iron body, bolted bonnet, renewable seat and disc, bronze mounted, flanged ends. Provide globe valves by Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc.; NIBCO, Inc.; Stockham Valves and Fittings, or Watts Regulator.

D. Balancing Valves: Valves 2" and smaller shall be 150 psi, bronze body, straight line pattern, square

head, threaded ends. Valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be 175 psi, lubricated plug type, semi-steel body, single gland, wrench operated, flanged ends. Provide balancing valves by Lunkenheimer Co.; Powell (The Wm.) Co., Flow Control Div. (Northstrom); Walworth Co.; or Watts Regulator. As an alternate to lubricated plug valves, balancing valves may be globe type valves. Sizes 2” and smaller shall be 300 psi all metal body, EPDM seat seals, threaded or soldered ends. Valves 2-1/2” and larger shall be 350 psi, ductile iron body, EPDM seat seals, grooved or threaded ends. Globe style balancing valves shall be Victaulic TA Hydronics or equal.

E. Ball Valves: Valves 2" and smaller shall be 150 psi, bronze body, full port, bronze trim, 2-piece

construction, RTFE seats and seals, threaded or soldered ends. The use of insulated handle ball valve units complete with protective sleeve, cylindrical handle, cap and insulating plug and memory stop (NIBCO NIB-SEAL handle or equal) is recommended. Valves 2-1/2" to 3" shall be 150 psi, bronze body, full port, 3-piece body, RTFE seats with bronze trim, threaded or soldered ends. Where pressed fit and grooved end piping systems are used, valves 2” and smaller shall be 300 psi stainless steel body, full port, stainless steel trim and plain ends. Valves 2” to 6” shall be 800 psi ductile iron body, standard port, 2-piece body, TFE seats with chrome plated carbon steel ball and stem, and grooved ends. Provide ball valves by Crane Co.; ITT Grinnell Valve Co., Inc.; Jenkins Bros.; NIBCO, Inc.; Stockham Valves and Fittings, Inc.; Victaulic Co. of America or Watts Regulator.

F. Butterfly Valves: Where butterfly valves are used for dead-end service, select lug-body type

valves. Wafer type valves may be used for in-line service applications. Valves 4" to 6" shall be




200 psi, cast-iron body, extended neck, aluminum bronze or stainless steel disc, reinforced resilient EPDM seat, manual lever and lock. Valves 8" and larger shall be 150 psi, cast-iron body, extended neck, aluminum bronze disc, reinforced resilient EPDM seat, gear operator, flanged ends. Where grooved joints piping systems are used, grooved end butterfly valves shall be used for dead end or inline service. Valves 2” to 12” shall be 300 psig, ductile-iron body, EPDM encapsulated ductile iron disc with integrally cast stem, manual lever and locking device of valves up to 6”, and gear-operators for vales 8” and larger. Provide butterfly valves by Center Line, Crane Co; DEMCO Valve USA.; Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc.; NIBCO, Inc.; Stockham Valves and Fittings; Victaulic Co. of America or Watts Regulator.

G. Check Valves: Valves 2" and smaller shall be Class 125, bronze body, horizontal swing, re-

grinding type, Y-pattern, renewable disc, threaded ends. Valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be Class 125, iron body, bolted bonnet, horizontal swing, renewable seat and disc with flanged ends. Lift type check valves may be used for piping 2 1/2" and larger and flow is vertically upward, similar to base mounted pump discharges. Where grooved-joint piping systems are used, grooved end spring assisted check valves shall be used for both horizontal and vertical installations. Valves 2-1/2” and 3” shall be 300 psi, ductile iron body, aluminum bronze disc with EPDM disc-mounted seal and PPS coated seat. Valves 4” and larger shall be 300 psi, ductile iron body, elastomer encapsulated disc with weld-in nickel seat. Valves shall have stainless steel springs and shafts. Provide swing check valves by Crane Co.; Lunkenheimer Co.; Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc.; NIBCO, Inc.; Stockham Valves and Fittings.; Victaulic Co. of America or Watts Regulator.

2.3. PIPING SPECIALTIES:

A. Escutcheons: Provide pipe escutcheons with inside diameter closely fitting pipe outside diameter,

or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas, prime paint finish for unoccupied areas. Pipe escutcheons for moist areas shall be cast or sheet brass; for dry areas may be sheet steel. Provide pipe escutcheons by Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co., Producers Specialty & Mfg. Corp. or Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co.

B. Strainer (S): Provide Y-type strainers full line size of connecting piping with Type 304 stainless

steel screens, with 3/64" perforations at 233 per square inch, 1/16” perforations at 135 per square inch or 1/8” perforations at 32 per square inch dependent on system service requirements. Strainers 2" and smaller shall have threaded ends, cast-bronze body, screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown. Strainers 2-1/2” and larger shall have flanged ends, cast-iron or bronze body, bolted screen retainer with off-center blowdown, or grooved ends, ductile-iron or malleable-iron body and access end cap, access coupling with EPDM gasket. Provide Y-type strainers by Armstrong Machine Works; Hoffman Specialty ITT, Fluid Handling Div.; Metraflex Co.; Spirax Sarco; Victaulic Co. of America; or Watts Regulator Co.

C. Dielectric Fittings (S): Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer which effectively

isolate ferrous from non-ferrous piping (electrical conductivity), which will prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion. Do not use dielectric unions. Provide dielectric flanges, fittings and couplings by B & K Industries, Inc.; Capital Mfg. Co. Div. of Harsco Corp.; Eclipse, Inc.; Epco Sales, Inc.; Perfection Corp.; Rockford-Eclipse Div.; or Victaulic Co. of America. (See installation note in Part 3 of this specification.)

D. Mechanical Sleeve Seals (S): Modular mechanical type, consisting of steel or high impact

thermoplastic sleeve, interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between the pipe and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates which cause rubber sealing to expand when tightened, providing air and watertight seal and electrical isolation. Provide mechanical sleeve seals for all piping passing through exterior walls from an interior exposed wall




space to below grade. Pipe sleeves shall have a combination water stop and anchor collar. Provide mechanical sleeve seals by Thunderline Corporation, Metraflex Company or approved equal.

E. Fire Barrier Penetration Seal (S): Provide seals for any opening through fire-rated walls, floors, or

ceilings used as passage for mechanical components such as piping or ductwork. Pipe penetrations shall be made in accordance with an approved and tested UL Through-Penetration Firestop System as specified in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. Cracks, voids, or holes up to 4" diameter shall be caulked using one-piece intumescent elastomer, non-corrosive to metal, compatible with piping, and capable of expanding 10 times when exposed to flame or heat, UL-listed. Openings 4" or greater shall be sealed using material capable of passing 3-hour fire test in accordance with ASTM E-814, consisting of wall wrap or liner, partitions, and end caps capable of expanding when exposed to temperatures of 250 to 350ºF (121 to 177ºC), UL-listed. Provide fire barrier penetration seals by Electro Products Div./3M Corp.; Hilti Construction Chemicals, Division of Hilti Inc., or Nelson Unit of General Signal.

F. Through-Penetration Firestop Device(S): In lieu of a UL Through-Penetration Firestop System for

piping penetration of fire-rated walls and floors, the Contractor, at his option, may use a UL certified Through-Penetration Firestop Device as specified in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. Provide Through-Penetration Firestop Devices by Proset Systems, Inc.; Hilti Firestop Systems, Division of Hilti Inc.; or approved equal.

G. Fabricated Piping Specialties:

1. Drip Pans: Provide drip pans fabricated from corrosion-resistant sheet metal with watertight

joints, and with edges turned up a minimum of 2". Reinforce top edge by rolling over 1/4" steel rod and welding into place. Provide pitched bottom on pan, complete with hole, gasket, and flange or brazed pipe outlet at low point as needed for watertight joint to 3/4" drain line connection.

2. Pipe Sleeves: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized or black steel pipe; remove all burrs;

dress all cut edges.

2.4. EXPANSION COMPENSATION (S):

A. General: Provide expansion joints for piping systems, selected to provide 200% absorption capacity of piping expansion between anchors. Provide pipe alignment guides on both sides of expansion joints, and elsewhere as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Expansion Compensator: Provide expansion compensators pressure rated for system pressure; 2-ply

phosphor bronze bellows, brass shrouds, and end fittings for copper piping systems, or 2-ply stainless steel bellows, carbon steel shrouds, and end fittings for steel piping systems. Provide internal guides and anti-torque device, and removable end clip for proper positioning. Where grooved-joint piping systems are used, provide manufacturer’s recommended expansion joint system to meet and/or exceed listed requirements. Provide expansion compensators by Flexonics Div., UOP, Inc.; Keflex, Inc.; Metraflex Co.; Victaulic Co. of America, or Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc.

C. Expansion Loop: Provide flexible expansion loops as indicated on plans to control expansion

without adding to the thrust load on pipe anchors. Loops shall consist of two flexible braided hose sections, two 90 elbows and one 180 return. Loops shall be installed in a pre-extended condition to permit near neutral position when piping system is in normal operation. Expansion loops shall be suitable for water and/or steam service. Expansion loops shall be Metraflex Metra Loops or equal.




D. Pipe Alignment Guides: Provide factory-fabricated guides, of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated

steel, consisting of bolted two-section outer cylinder and base, and a two-section guiding spider bolted tight to pipe. For insulated piping, provide pre-insulated guides with thermal characteristics similar to that specified for surrounding piping systems. Provide pipe alignment guides by Metraflex Co., Flexonics Div., UOP, Inc., or approved equal.

2.5. GAUGES (S) (O/M):

A. Glass Thermometers shall be 9" long, complete with die cast aluminum case with baked epoxy

enamel finish, glass front, 180º adjustable angle, brass stem; mercury filled, magnifying lens tube, non-reflective, white-coated aluminum scale with permanently etched markings. Scale and range of 30ºF to 240ºF for hot water and 30ºF to 120ºF for chilled water. Provide glass thermometers by Ernst Gauge Co.; Marshalltown Instruments, Inc.; Trerice (H.O.) Co.; Weiss Instruments, Inc.; or Weksler Instruments Corp.

B. Dial Thermometers shall be bi-metal, stainless steel case and stem, minimum 4-1/2" diameter dial,

dust and water proof, external calibration adjustment, dished anti-parallax dial, adjustable angle stem, glass crystal lens, 1% dial range accuracy and range of 30ºF to 240ºF for hot water and 30ºF to 120ºF for chilled water. Provide dial type insertion thermometers by Marsh Instrument Co., Unit of General,; Taylor Instrument Co.; Trerice (H.O.) Co.; Weiss Instruments, Inc.; or Weksler Instruments Corp.

C. Thermometer Wells shall be brass or stainless steel, pressure rated to match piping system; provide

2" extension for insulated piping. Where thermometer wells are provided without the installed thermometer, provide cap nut with chain fastened permanently to thermometer well. Thermometer wells shall be furnished by thermometer manufacturer.

D. Pressure gauges shall be general use type, 1% accuracy, ANSI B40.1 Grade A, phosphor bronze

bourdon, with bottom connection. Stainless steel or brass case, 4-1/2" diameter glass lens, 1/4" male NPT brass connector, white coated aluminum scale with permanently etched markings, and range shall be a minimum 1.5 times normal system operating pressure. Provide pressure gauges by Marsh Instrument Co., Unit of General Signal; Marshalltown Instruments, Inc.; Trerice (H.O.) Co.; Weiss Instruments, Inc.; Mieksler Instruments Corp.; or Weksler.

E. Pressure Gauge Accessories:

1. Gauge Cock: Brass with 1/4" female NPT on each end, and "T" handle brass plug. (Provide

syphon on all steam system gauges.)

2. Pressure Snubber: 1/4" brass bushing with corrosion resistant porous metal disk, through which pressure fluid is filtered. Select disk material for fluid served and pressure rating.

3. Hydronic Trumpet Valve(S): 2, 3 or 4-port all brass manifold valve assembly with spring

return push buttons, threaded taps or compression nuts on inlet ports, mounting bracket and gauge port. Unit shall be Flow Conditions Corp. or equal.

2.6. SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS

A. Piping Hangers and Supports: Provide factory-fabricated piping hangers and supports complying

with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information.




Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports from list below as required to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping. Provide copper-plated hangers and supports for copper-piping systems.

Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1.

Steel Double Bolt Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 3.

Steel Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 4.

Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7.

Adjustable Swivel Rings, Band Type: MSS Type 10.

Pipe Saddle Supports: MSS Type 36, including steel pipe base-support and cast-iron floor flange.

Pipe Stanchion Saddles: MSS Type 37, including steel pipe base support and cast-iron floor flange.

Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports: MSS Type 38, including steel pipe base support and cast-iron floor flange. Single Pipe Rolls: MSS Type 41.

Adjustable Roller Hangers: MSS Type 43.

Pipe Roll Stands: MSS Type 44.

Pipe Rolls and Plates: MSS Type 45.

Adjustable Pipe Roll Stands: MSS Type 46.

Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8.

Four-bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 42.

B. Building and Hanger-Rod Attachments: Provide factory-fabricated building and hanger-rod

attachments complying with MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal-piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building and hanger-rod attachments from list below as required to suit size and weight of pipe being supported.

Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13.

Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16.

Concrete Inserts: MSS Type 18.

Top Beam C-Clamps: MSS Type 19.

Side Beam Clamps: MSS Type 20.




Center Beam Clamps: MSS Type 21.

C-Clamps: MSS Type 23.

Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30.

Steel Brackets: MSS Type 31, 32 and 33.

C. Manufacturers of Hangers and Supports: Provide hangers and supports by B-Line Systems, Inc.; Elcen Metal Products Co.; Fee & Mason Mfg. Co., Div. Figgie International; ITT Grinnell Corp.; or PHD Manufacturing, Inc.

D. Pipe Mounting Roof Support Pedestal (S): Minimum 18-gauge galvanized steel with fully mitered

and welded corners, raised cant (if required by roof insulation or roofing type), internal bulkhead reinforcing, integral base plates, pressure treated wood nailers and 18-gauge galvanized steel counterflashing. Provide adjustable pipe support assembly to match installation. Provide supports by Custom Curb, Inc.; Pate Co.; Roof Products and Systems Corp.; or Thycurb Div. of Thybar Corp.

E. Pipe Support Racks: Provide pipe support racks constructed of metal framing system, consisting of

1-5/8" width, hot-dipped galvanized steel channel, continuous concrete inserts, fittings, nuts, bolts, pipe rollers, and other accessories as required for a complete installation. The system shall be manufactured by B-Line Systems, Inc., Unistrut Building Systems or Elcen Metal Products Company.

F. Pipe Pier Roof Pipe Supports: Piping on roof surfaces shall be supported by a polyethylene foam

block with an integral strut channel for receiving standard strut clamps, rollers, attachment support for multiple pipes, etc. Pipe pier shall be installed according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Roof pipe supports shall be spaced according to industry standards and shall be installed to allow for proper expansion and contraction. Pipe piers shall be resistant to deterioration, lightweight, and suitable to protect roof surface from punctures and loading pressures. Pipe piers are manufactured by Erico Industries.

G. Prefabricated Roof Accessories: Roof penetrations of piping, conduit, ductwork, etc. shall be fully

protected by prefabricated roof accessories designed to create a water tight roofing system. Accessories shall include curbs, equipment supports, portal caps, flashing seals, pre-molded corners, roof drain and scupper penetrations, roof vents and breathers, etc. Flexible flashing materials shall be UV stabilized EPDM, neoprene, PVC or silicone as required by the application details. Roof accessories shall be provided by Portals Plus, Inc. or accepted equal.

2.7. SADDLES AND SHIELDS (S): Provide factory fabricated saddles or shields under pipe hangers and

supports, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation. Protection saddles shall be MSS Type 39; fill interior voids with segments of insulation matching adjoining insulation. Protection shields shall be MSS Type 40; of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing of insulation. Thermal hanger shields shall be constructed of 360º insert of high density calcium silicate, or similar rigid insulation, with sheet metal shield centered on bottom half of piping insulation. Provide assembly with insulation of same thickness as adjoining insulation. Provide thermal saddles and shields by Elcen Metal Products Co.; PHD Manufacturing, Inc.; or Pipe Shields, Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION




3.1. PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS:

A. General: Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with industry practices. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate accessible unions, flanges, or removable couplings, for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes by use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16" misalignment tolerance. Comply with ANSI B 31 Code for Pressure Piping.

B. Piping Installation: Locate piping runs vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain) and avoid

diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines. Locate runs as shown on plans or described by diagrams, details and notations. Run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building or installed equipment. Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of building; limit clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of piping, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated piping for 1" clearance outside insulation. In finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view by locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings; do not encase horizontal runs in partitions, unless specifically indicated to do so. Do not run piping through transformer vaults, electric switchgear rooms, elevator equipment rooms, and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces except as required to serve those spaces. Do not run piping directly above electrical panels (per NEC) or elevator equipment, control panels or electrical devices. Coordinate the location and elevation of all piping with other installations (i.e., ducts, conduit, equipment, etc.) located in the same space. Installations above ceilings shall be installed to allow installation of other indicated materials in conjunction with piping while achieving the finished ceiling height indicated. Verify grades, inverts, and topographic conditions prior to any trenching, excavation, or sewer installations. In the event existing conditions prevent installation in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall investigate and submit several alternate solutions to the Architect for review and consideration.

C. Piping System Joints: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and with

applicable industry standards for installation of each type piping system joint.

1. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compound or pipe joint tape (teflon) on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed.

2. Braze copper tube-and-fitting joints where indicated, in accordance with ASME B31.

3. Solder copper tube-and-fitting joints in accordance with recognized industry practice. Cut

tube ends squarely, ream to full inside diameter, and clean outside of tube ends and inside of fittings. Apply solder flux to joint areas of both tubes and fittings. Insert tube full depth into fitting, and solder in manner which will draw solder full depth and circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens.

4. Weld pipe joints in accordance with ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31.

5. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and

equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of gaskets.




6. Mechanical Pipe Joints: Comply with fitting manufacturer's instructions for making grooves in pipe ends, pressed type mechanical coupling or permanent push-to-connect connectors. Use manufacturers recommended custom tools prep piping, cut grooves and install mechanical or press joints. Remove burrs and ream pipe ends. Pipe ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove. Assemble joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

7. Unions: Furnish and install unions or flared compression connector adjacent to each control

valve, and at the final connection to each piece of equipment having 2-1/2" and smaller connections. Copper runouts, sized 3/4” and smaller, may be soldered directly without unions, and field cut as needed for servicing. Where grooved joint couplings are used, unions are not required.

8. Reducers: Provide eccentric reducers for reduction in pipe sizes. Install with the level side

down for drainage, gravity condensate piping and the level side up for all water piping systems.

A. Cleaning, Flushing, Inspecting: Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous

materials. Flush out piping systems with clean water before proceeding with required tests. Inspect each run of system piping for completion of joints, supports and accessory items.

B. Piping Tests:

1. Test pressure piping in accordance with ASME B31 but not less than 150% of system

operating pressure (differential pump head) or 125 psig test pressure, whichever is greater. Test piping system before insulation is installed wherever feasible, and remove all control and monitoring devices that could be damaged by the higher test pressure before testing. Test each natural section of each piping system independently but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Required test period is 4 hours. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is observed or if pressure drop exceeds 5 psig.

2. Repair piping systems sections by disassembly and re-installation, using new materials to

extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods.

3. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed.

3.2. VALVES

A. Installation: Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including

valves in branch lines to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary. Install valves with stems pointed up where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from horizontal plane.

1. Insulation: Where insulation is indicated, install extended-stem valves, arranged in proper

manner to receive insulation. All cold water piping valves must be fully vapor sealed at valve neck.

2. Valve ends (pipe connections) shall be solder-joint, threaded or press fit type for tube or pipe

sizes 2-1/2" and smaller and grooved or flanged ends for sizes 3" and larger.




3. Fluid Control: Install gate, ball, globe, and butterfly valves to comply with ANSI B31.9 and as specified in the individual piping specification sections. Where throttling is indicated or recognized as principal reason for valve, install ball or globe valves in sizes 2-1/2" and smaller, and butterfly valves in sizes 3" and larger.

4. Installation of Check Valves: Install swing check valves as indicated with hinge pin

horizontally perpendicular to center line of pipe. Lift type check valves may be used only where fluid flow is vertically upward (i.e. vertical riser at pump discharge).

B. Adjusting and Cleaning: After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final

testing, adjusting, and balancing, inspect each valve for possible leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks.

3.3. INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES:

A. Pipe Escutcheons: Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through floors, walls,

partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view in a finished or occupied space.

B. Strainers: Install strainers full size of pipeline with pipe nipple and a quarter turn ball valve in strainer blow down connection, except for strainers 2" and smaller installed immediately ahead of automatic control valves feeding individual terminals may be capped using a screw in pipe plug or 3/4” quarter-turn ball valve. Provide drain line from blowdown valve to plumbing drain, full size of blow down connection.

C. Dielectric Flanges, Fittings and Couplings: Install at each transition piping joint between ferrous

and non-ferrous piping. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. As a Contractor option, a cast bronze threaded fitting or valve may be used to interface between copper and steel piping in lieu of dielectric fittings or flanges. Do not use dielectric unions.

D. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Loosely assemble rubber links around pipe with bolts and pressure plates

located under each bolt head and nut. Push into sleeve and center. Tighten bolts until links have expanded to form watertight seal.

E. Fire Barrier Penetration Seals: Fill entire opening with sealing compound. Adhere to

manufacturer's installation instructions. Pipe penetrations at fire-rated assemblies shall be made in accordance with an approved and tested UL Through-Penetration Firestop System number or a UL certified Through-Penetration Firestop Device as specified in the UL Fire Resistance Directory.

F. Drip Pans: Locate drip pans under piping passing over or within 3 feet horizontally of electrical

equipment or panels, and elsewhere as indicated. Hang from structure with adjustable chains and building attachments. Brace to prevent sagging or swaying, if required. Connect 3/4" drain line to drain connection, and run to nearest available plumbing drain. Drain pans under air conditioning units may be equipped with a safety stop switch in lieu of connecting to a drain line.

G. Pipe Sleeves: Install pipe sleeves where piping passes through walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs.

Install sleeves accurately centered on pipe runs. Size sleeves so that piping and insulation (if any) will have free movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion. Where insulation includes vapor-barrier jacket, provide sleeve with sufficient clearance for installation. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of construction penetrated, and finish flush to surface. Extend floor sleeves 3/4" above floor or raised curb in mechanical equipment rooms and similar service and utility areas. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of concrete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent concrete and other materials from entering




sleeves. Where a waterproof membrane is installed, extend sleeve 4" above finished floor and provide a flashing flange as required for a watertight installation. The use of "Pro Set" sleeves complete with fire fill core and watertight end plugs will be permitted as a Contractor option on an equality basis.

H. Sleeve Seals: Fill and pack annular space between sleeve and pipe with oakum or mineral fiber,

caulk with flexible sealant on both sides. Provide mechanical sleeve seals at all below grade penetrations of exterior building walls, sound-rated walls and where exposed in finished areas.

3.4. EXPANSION COMPENSATION:

A. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints for adequate expansion of installed piping system. Install

in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide pipe anchors and pipe alignment guides in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Align units properly to avoid end loading and torsion stress.

B. Expansion Loops and Elbows: Fabricate expansion loops and elbows for adequate expansion of

installed piping system. Subject loop to cold spring which will absorb 50% of total expansion between hot and cold conditions. Provide pipe anchors and pipe alignment guides as required and determined by Installer to properly anchor piping in relationship to expansion loops or as indicated on drawings when shown.

C. Expansion Compensation for Risers and Terminals: Install connection between piping mains and

risers with at least 4 pipe fittings, including tee in main. Install connections between piping risers and terminal units with at least 4 pipe fittings, including tee in riser.

3.5. GAUGES:

A. Installation of Thermometers: Install thermometers in vertical upright position, and tilted so as to be

easily read by observer standing on floor. Install as indicated on connection details.

B. Installation of Pressure Gauges: Install pressure gauges in piping as indicated with gauge cock between piping tee and gauge. Install snubber on gauges at pump discharge. Install siphons on steam pressure gauges. Hydronic trumpet valves shall be used in lieu of multiple single gauges at circulation pump suction, discharge and system differential pressure test locations. See "Base Mounted Pump Connections” detail on drawings.

C. Adjusting and Cleaning: Adjust faces of gauges of proper angle for best visibility. Clean window

of gauges and factory-finished surfaces. Replace cracked or broken windows, repair any scratched or marred surfaces.

3.6. SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS:

A. Installation of Building Attachments: Install building attachments at required locations within

concrete or on structural steel for proper piping support. In no case shall attachments be made directly to metal roof or floor deck for pipes over 2" in diameter. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69, but in no case shall attachments for 4" diameter and larger pipes be spaced greater than 8'-0" on centers, and trapeze hangers shall also be spaced no more than 8'-0" on centers. Attachments shall be spaced so that maximum load to wood framing does not exceed 200 lbs. Install additional hangers at concentrated loads, including valves and strainers, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is




placed; fasten insert securely to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500 psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

B. Installation of Hangers and Supports: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support

piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacing complying with MSS SP-69 and as indicated above. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal straps to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping. Additional requirements are as follows:

1. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and

other accessories. 2. Support fire-water piping independently of other piping. 3. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are

copper plated, or by inserting a double ply thickness of roofing felt paper between the piping and pipe hanger. (This requirement does not apply to insulated copper piping.)

4. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit

freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units.

5. Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement

will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

6. Insulated Piping: Install either thermal hanger shields, protection shields or protection saddles on all insulated piping in accordance with industry standards. Protection saddles shall be used on hot piping only. For cold piping, use thermal hanger shields to prevent condensation on pipe support.

7. Pipe hangers shall be attached to the top or bottom flanges of steel beams using beam clamps

without welding. Pipe hangers shall be attached to the top or bottom chords of steel joists using threaded rods between chord members, located within 6" of a panel point, or add additional bracing to nearest panel point.

8. Pipe supports for vertical risers passing through above grade floors, and exposed to normal

view, shall be located below the floor slab, with only the pipe sleeve extending through the slab. This requirement applies to all water piping, including fire water standpipes exposed in stair towers. Caulk void between the piping (or pipe insulation) and the sleeve using flexible sealant material.

C. Installation of Anchors: Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those

permitted by ANSI B31, and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. Fabricate anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and to structure. Where expansion compensators are required, install anchors in accordance with expansion unit manufacturer's instructions, to limit movement of piping and forces to maximums recommended for each unit. Make provisions for anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping.




D. Adjusting: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on all attachments. Provide grout under equipment supports as necessary to bring piping and equipment to proper level, alignment and elevations.




REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 1

SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. WORK INCLUDED, BUT NOT LIMITED TO: All piping and materials for complete refrigerant piping system. This Section includes specialty items common only to refrigerant piping systems.


A. ANSI Compliance: Fabricate and install refrigerant piping in accordance with ANSI B31.5

"Refrigeration Piping", and extend applicable lower pressure limits to pressures below 15 psig.

B. Code Compliance: Fabricate and install refrigerant piping in accordance with International Mechanical Code, latest edition.

C. ASHRAE Compliance: Fabricate and install refrigerant piping in accordance with ASHRAE 15

"Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration".

1.3. SUBMITTALS: Submit layout drawings of refrigerant tubing and fittings including, but not necessarily limited to; tubing, sizes, lengths, flow capacities, location of in-line accessories, equipment connections, building wall entry, trench access and slopes of horizontal runs. Also, address the issue of oil return and document any proposed modifications. Submit refrigerant piping drawings with chiller, condensing unit, etc. shop drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by installer and equipment manufacturer to comply with installation requirements. Provide materials and products complying with ANSI B31.5 Code for Refrigeration Piping where applicable, base pressure rating on refrigerant piping system maximum design pressures. Provide refrigerant piping connections matching equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in refrigerant piping systems. Piping shall be sized by equipment manufacturer to match capacity and installation shown. Where more than one type of materials and products are indicated, selection is Installer's option, except that suction, liquid and discharge piping shall be of the same material.

2.2. BASIC PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS:

A. Tubing Size 3/4" and smaller; Copper tube; Type ACR, soft annealed temper; cast copper-alloy

fittings for flared copper tubes; flared joints. Below ground tubing shall be Type K annealed-copper.

B. Tubing Size 7/8" and larger: Copper tube; Type ACR, soft annealed temper; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; brazed joints. Below ground tubing shall be Type K annealed-copper.

C. Tubing Size 7/8" and larger: Copper tube; Type ACR, hard-drawn temper; wrought-copper,

solder-joint fittings; brazed joints.

D. Brazed Joints: Braze joints using American Welding Society (AWS) Classification BAg -2 silver for brazing filler metal.

2.3. SPECIAL REFRIGERANT VALVES: Include the following:




A. Globe and Check Valves (S)

1. Globe Shutoff Valves: Forged brass, packed, back seating, winged seal cap, 275°F (149ºC)

temperature rating, 500 psi working pressure.

2. Check Valves: Straight through or angle pattern, solder-end connections, forged brass, accessible internal parts, soft synthetic seat, fully guided piston and stainless steel spring, 275F temperature rating, 500 psi working pressure.

3. Manufacturer: Provide globe and check valves by Henry Valve Co.; Parker Hannifin Corp.,

Refrigeration & Air Cond. Div.; or Sporland Valve Co.

B. Solenoid Valves (S): 2-way, forged brass, designed to conform to ARI 760, normally closed, teflon valve seat, NEMA 1 solenoid enclosure, 24 volt, 60 Hz., UL-listed, 1/2" conduit adapter, 250F temperature rating, 400 psi working pressure. Provide solenoid valves by Alco Controls Div., Emerson Electric Co.; Automatic Switch Co.; or Sporland Valve Co.

2.4. REFRIGERANT ACCESSORIES(S):

A. Refrigerant Strainers: Straight or angle type brass shell and end connections, brazed joints, monel

screen, 100 mesh in lines up to 1-1/8”, 60 mesh on larger lines and 40 mesh on suction lines, UL-listed, 500 psi working pressure.

B. Moisture-Liquid Indicators: Forged brass, single port, removable cap, polished optical glass, solder

connections, UL-listed, 200°F (93 C) temperature rating, 500 psi working pressure.

C. Refrigerant Filter-Driers: Steel shell, ceramic fired desiccant core, solder connections, UL-listed, 350 psi working pressure.

D. Refrigerant Filter-Driers: Corrosion-resistant steel shell, steel flange ring and spring, wrought

copper fittings, ductile iron cover plate with steel cap screws, replaceable filter-drier core kit, including gaskets, 500 psi working pressure. Filter drier cartridge shall comply with ARI 730 for capacity.

E. Evaporator Pressure Regulators: Provide corrosion-resistant, spring loaded, stainless steel springs,

pressure operated, evaporator pressure regulator, in size and working pressure required, with copper connections.

F. Refrigerant Discharge Line Mufflers: Provide discharge line mufflers on each compressor, sized as

recommended by equipment manufacturer for use in service indicated.

G. Manufacturer: Provide refrigeration accessories by Alco Controls Div., Emerson Electric Co.; Henry Valve Co.; Parker-Hannifin Corp., Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Div.; or Sporland Valve Co.

2.5. REFRIGERANT AND OILS: Provide refrigerant and oils which are environmentally safe, approved by

EPA, local building codes, and state and federal agencies having jurisdiction, and are fully compatible with equipment and accessories.

PART 3 - EXECUTION




3.1. INSTALLATION OF REFRIGERANT PIPING:

A. General: Install refrigerant piping and accessories in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Comply with ASHRAE 15.

B. Install refrigerant piping with 1/4" per foot (1%) downward slope in direction of oil return to

compressor. Provide oil traps and double suction risers where required to provide oil return.

C. Clean refrigerant piping by swabbing with dry lintless (linen) cloth, followed by refrigerant oil soaked swab. Remove excess oil by swabbing with cloth soaked in high flash point petroleum solvent, squeezed dry.

D. Bleed dry nitrogen through refrigerant piping during brazing operations.

3.2. INSTALLATION OF SPECIAL REFRIGERANT VALVES: Install refrigerant valves in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. Remove accessible internal parts before brazing, replace after joints are completed and cooled. Install solenoid valves with stem pointing upwards.

3.3. INSTALLATION OF REFRIGERANT ACCESSORIES:

A. Install refrigerant strainer and filter-dryer as recommended by equipment manufacturer. Provide

valves as needed to properly isolate, service, and re-charge system.

B. Evaporator Pressure Regulators: Install in refrigerant suction lines. Adjust for proper evaporator pressure.

C. Refrigerant Discharge Line Mufflers: Install in horizontal or downflow portion of hot-gas

(discharge) lines, immediately after leaving compressor, not in riser. Mufflers are required on all compressors of 15-ton size and larger, unless manufacturer can show that noise will not create a nuisance problem.

D. Install moisture-liquid indicator in liquid lines between filter dryer and thermostatic expansion valve

and in liquid line to the receiver. E. Install flexible connectors at compressor connections.

3.4. EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS: Connect refrigerant piping to mechanical equipment complying with

equipment manufacturer's instructions.

3.5. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: Prior to initial operation, clean and test refrigerant piping in accordance with ANSI B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping". Perform initial test with dry nitrogen, using soap solution to test all joints. Perform final test with 27" vacuum, and then 200 psi pressure using electronic leak detector. System must be entirely leak-free. Repair or replace refrigerant piping as required to eliminate leaks, and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance.




3.6. DEHYDRATION AND CHARGING SYSTEM: Isolate compressors, condensers, evaporator and safety devices prone to damage from the system prior to pressure testing. (Install core in filter dryer after leak test but before evacuation.) Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump, until temperature of 35 F is indicated on vacuum dehydration indicator. During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots in piping. Maintain vacuum on system for minimum of 5 hours after closing valve between vacuum pump and system. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allow pressure to build up to 2 psi. (Complete charging of system, using new filter dryer core in charging line.) Provide full operating charge according to equipment manufacturer's instructions.



Roanoke City Public Schools SECTION 233113 - AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL


A. SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork.

B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and

Ventilating Systems" and NFPA 90B "Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

C. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to construction of

ductwork and accessories.

D. UL Compliance: Construct, test, and label fire dampers in accordance with UL Standard 555 "Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers".

E. Field Reference Manual: Have available for reference at project field office, copy of SMACNA

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible", current edition.

1.2. SUBMITTALS:

A. See Section 230512 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS, for general submittal requirements. Requirements listed below are in addition to those listed in Section 230512 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each

type of ductwork accessory; and for air outlets and inlets. Include the following information:

1. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating room number, model number, size, air quantity, pressure drop, throw (ft), sound level (NC), and accessories furnished for each air device.

2. Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, and duct accessory furnished; indicating

construction, finish, and mounting details.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Ductwork accessories: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of ductwork accessory showing interfacing requirements with ductwork, method of fastening or support, and methods of assembly of components.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawing for each type of

air outlet and inlet, indicating materials and methods of assembly of components. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. DUCTWORK:

A. Ductwork Materials:



1. General: Where ductwork will be exposed to view in occupied space, (i.e., laundry areas, storage rooms, etc.) provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains and discolorations, and other imperfections, including those which would impair painting. Ductwork designated "Exposed" shall be suitable for installations visible to the general public, but not a prominent architectural feature. Ductwork designated "Architecturally Exposed" shall be suitable for installations visible to the general public with an architecturally pleasing appearance. "Architecturally Exposed" ductwork shall be characterized by the following additional features: Carbon arc welding; grinding of all weld knots and irregularities; fitting seams on top of fitting only; tack weld locations inside of duct; one-piece conical outlets only; outside sealant-spray only; inside sealant-spray or mastic.

2. Sheet Metal: Galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, lock forming quality; with

G 90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 525; and mill phosphatized for painting in exposed locations.

3. Stainless Steel Sheet: Comply with ASTM A167; Type 302, 304, or 316; with No. 4 finish

where exposed to view in occupied spaces, No. 1 finish elsewhere. Protect finished surfaces with mill-applied adhesive protective paper, maintained through fabrication and installation.

4. Aluminum sheet: Comply with ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14.

5. Copper Sheet: Comply with ASTM B 370; H00 temper, except where 060 temper is required

for unusual forming. B. Shop Fabricated Ductwork:

1. Shop fabricate ductwork in 4, 5, 8, 10 or 12-ft lengths, unless required to complete runs.

Preassemble work in shop to greatest extent possible, so as to minimize field assembly of systems. Disassemble systems only to extent necessary for shipping and handling. Match-mark sections for reassembly and coordinated installation.

2. Shop fabricate ductwork of gauges and reinforcement complying with SMACNA "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards".

3. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts. Low pressure 90º elbows may be square type with turning vanes or long radius type at the discretion of the Contractor. Elbows in round and flat oval ductwork shall be radius type only. Fabricate radius type elbows with center-line radius equal to one and one-half times the associated duct width; and fabricate to include turning vanes in elbows where shorter radius is necessary. Limit angular transitions to 30º for contracting and expanding tapers.

4. Fabricate ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest extent

possible.

5. Fabricate ductwork with duct liner in each section of duct where so indicated or specified. Laminate liner to internal surfaces of duct in accordance with instructions by manufacturers of lining and adhesive, and fasten with mechanical fasteners. All exposed cut ends of duct liner shall be “buttered” with an adhesive sealant to reduce flaking into the air stream.

6. Duct sizes indicated are actual sheet metal sizes for both lined and unlined duct.

7. All shop built work may, as a Contractor option, be assembled using a system of factory-

fabricated frames, clips, cleats, gaskets, connectors, access panels, hangers, supports, etc. as manufactured by Ductmate Industries, Inc.



C. Factory-fabricated low pressure ductwork:

# RETAIN BELOW FOR (ROUND) LOW PRESSURE AIR SYSTEMS IF DESIRED. SPECIFICALLY NOTE ON DRAWINGS, OR EXPAND THIS ARTICLE, TO DEFINE WHAT DUCTWORK SYSTEMS CAN USE THIS DUCTWORK.

1. General: Provide factory-fabricated duct and fittings, in lieu of shop-fabricated duct and

fittings.

2. Material: Galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, lock forming quality, with ASTM A 525, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized.

3. Gauge: 26-gauge minimum for round and oval ducts and fittings, 4" through 24" diameter. 4. Elbows: One piece construction for 90º and 45º elbows 14" and smaller. Provide multiple

gore construction for larger diameters with standing seam circumferential joint.

5. Divided Flow Fittings: 20-guage 90º conical tees or 45º conical laterals, constructed with outlet welded to duct fitting body.

6. Manufacturers: Provide factory-fabricated ductwork and fittings by: Semco Mfg., Inc.,

Lindab, Inc. or United Sheet Metal Div., United McGill Corp.

D. Factory-fabricated medium and high pressure ductwork:

1. General: This section applies to all round and flat-oval ductwork used as a part of a VAV

system with a maximum working pressure up to +10” wg.

2. Round Ductwork (-2” wg to +4 wg): Construct of galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527 by the following methods and in minimum gauges listed.

Minimum Method of

Diameter Gauge Manufacture

3" to 16" 26 Spiral Lockseam 17" to 26" 24 Spiral Lockseam 28" to 36" 22 Spiral Lockseam 38" to 50" 20 Spiral Lockseam 52" to 76" 18 Spiral Lockseam

Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum two gauges heavier material than connecting ductwork listed. Provide continuous weld along seams. (Aluminum ductwork shall comply with recommendations outlined in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.)

3. Round Ductwork (+4” wg to +10 wg): Construct of galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527 by the following methods and in minimum gauges listed:

Minimum Method of Diameter Gauge Manufacture



3" to 14" 26 Spiral Lockseam 15" to 26" 24 Spiral Lockseam 27" to 36" 22 Spiral Lockseam 37" to 50" 20 Spiral Lockseam 51" to 84" 18 Spiral Lockseam

Over 85” 16 Spiral Lockseam

Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum two gauges heavier material than connecting ductwork listed. Provide continuous weld along seams. (Aluminum ductwork shall comply with recommendations outlined in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.)

4. Flat-Oval Ductwork (+2” wg to +10 wg): Construct of galvanized sheet steel complying with

ASTM A 527, of spiral lockseam construction, in minimum gauges listed.

Major Dimension Minimum Fittings & Duct Width Gauge Couplings

Under 24" 24 20 25" to 36" 22 20 37" to 48" 22 18 49” to 70” 20 16 Over 71” 18 16

5. Duct Connection Systems (Contractor Option):

a. A self-sealing duct system may be used in lieu of field sealing all single wall fittings and pipe joints for sized 3” through 50” diameter. Factory installed “U” profile rubber gaskets shall be double lipped EDPM capable of maintaining SMACNA leakage class 3 (-20” WG to +12” WG) with no additional sealants. Fittings and connectors shall match the duct materials. Ductwork and connection system shall be Lindab, Inc. Spirosafe, or equal.

b. Provide a duct section connecting system comprised of factory fabricated 18 gauge

galvanized T-24 steel flanges suitable for welding to the ends of both single and double wall duct sections. Seal the lap joint between duct and connector using a brush type sealant to achieve a 100% seal over a full range of pressures between 20” wg positive and 10” wg negative with virtually no leakage. Field connect matching flange sections using a 5/16 x 3/4 neoprene gasket and No. 10 Tec screws t 6” oc. Provide reinforcement on flat-oval ducts as required by SMACNA Section 1. Duct connector system shall be AccuFlange as manufactured by Accuduct Manufacturing of Algona, WA.

E. Casings and Plenums: Construct and install casings and plenums in accordance with SMACNA

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards" for the pressure classification of the duct system. Shop fabricate casings to greatest extent possible, so as to minimize field fabrication and assembly. Disassemble only to extent necessary for shipping and handling. Match-mark sections for assembly at project.

2.2. DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES:

A. Duct Sealant: Non-hardening, non-migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant, type applicable for fabrication/installation detail, as compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically for sealing joints and seams in ductwork.



B. Duct Cement: Non-hardening migrating mastic or liquid neoprene based cement, type applicable for fabrication/installation detail, as compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically for cementing fitting components, or longitudinal seams in ductwork.

C. Ductwork Support Materials: Provide fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of

ductwork made of the same material as the duct being supported.

D. Flexible Ducts (S): Factory fabricated, self-supporting flexible metal, duct wrapped with a nominal 1 inch thick, 1 lb./cu. ft. density fiberglass insulation and sheathed in a seamless exterior vapor barrier jacket. Provide inner core of single or double ply aluminum, closely corrugated for strength, with seams interlocked, folded flat, and knurled to insure airtightness. Low pressure runouts to single diffusers may be chlorinated polyethylene or neoprene coated canvas or fiberglass fabric permanently bonded to a spring steel wire helix. Flexible duct assembly shall meet the requirements of UL Standard for Safety, Air Ducts (UL-181) for Class 1 air duct material. Ducts shall be designed for the minimum pressure 10" WG and a minimum air velocity to match the installed system. Provide flexible ducts and accessories as manufactured by Clevaflex Division, Clevepak Corp.; Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. Thermaflex Division, Automation Industries; or United Sheet Metal Division, United McGill Corp.

E. Spin-in Collar and Lo-Loss Fittings (S): All round branch take-offs from recetangular mains shall

be made with factory-fabricated fittings constructed with not less than 26-gauge steel. Unless otherwise noted, the fittings shall be either of the conical/bell mouth type with balancing damper and positive locking wing nut or high efficiency low-loss type with rectangular 45º entry pattern transitioned to a round outlet complete with balancing damper and locking devices. Provide fittings by Clevaflex Division, Clevepak Corp.; Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.; Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc., Thermaflex Division, Automation Industries; or United Sheet Metal Division, United McGill Corp.

F. Dampers (S):

1. Low Pressure Manual Volume Dampers: Provide dampers of opposed-blade type, constructed

in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards".

2. Control Dampers: Provide dampers with parallel blades for 2-position control, or opposed blades for modulating control. Construct blades of 16-ga steel, provide heavy-duty molded self-lubricating nylon bearings, 1/2" diameter or hex-shaped steel axles. Construct frame of 4" x 1-1/4" x 16-gauge channel. Provide galvanized steel finish with aluminum touch-up. Dampers used as part of the Temperature Control System shall be furnished by the controls subcontractors.

3. Manufacturer: Provide dampers by Air Balance, Inc.; Airguide Corp.; Arrow Louver and

Damper, Div. of Arrow United Industries, Inc.; Louvers & Dampers, Inc.; Penn Ventilator Co. or Ruskin Mfg. Co.

G. Turning Vanes: Provide factory fabricated turning vanes constructed of l-1/2" wide single thickness

curved blades set at 3/4" o.c., supported with bars perpendicular to blades set at 2" o.c., and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ductwork. On large ducts (24" wide and over), provide acoustic turning vanes constructed of airfoil shaped blades with perforated faces and fiberglass fill. Provide turning vanes by Aero Dyne Co.; Anemostat Products Div., Dynamics Corp. of America; Barber-Colman Co.; Duro Dyne Corp.; Environmental Elements Corp.; Subs. Koppers Co., Inc.; Register & Grille Mfg. Co., Inc.; Krueger Mfg. Co., Inc.

H. Duct Hardware: Provide duct hardware, manufactured by one manufacturer for all items on project,

for the following:



1. Instrument Test Ports: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet, and elsewhere as needed to test and balance the system. Test ports shall be die-cast aluminum with gasket and screw cap with chain. Provide extension type test ports for all insulated ducts and plenums.

2. Quadrant Locks: Provide for each damper, quadrant lock device on one end of shaft; and end

bearing plate on other end. Provide extended quadrant locks and end extended bearing plates for externally insulated ductwork. Quadrant lock base plate shall be left or right handed to match the actual direction of operation required on the duct.

3. Splitter Damper Hardware: Provide splitter damper hardware consisting of damper hinges,

splitter damper bracket, ball joint damper casting, and connecting rod for shop fabrication of splitter dampers.

4. Manufacturer: Provide duct hardware by Duro Dyne Corp.; Ventfabrics, Inc. or Young

Regulator Co.

I. Duct Access Doors:

1. For Rectangular Ductwork: Construct of same or greater gauge as ductwork served, provide insulated doors for insulated ductwork. Provide flush frames for uninsulated ductwork, extended frames for externally insulated duct. Provide door with one side fully hinged, other side with one handle-type latch for doors 12" high and smaller, 2 handle-type latches for larger doors. Doors shall be fully gasketed and airtight. Fully removable round access doors with compression latches may be used as a Contractor option.

2. For Round or Flat-Oval Ductwork: Provide complete duct section/access door combination

assembly supplied by ductwork manufacturer. Construct of 2 gauges heavier metal than ductwork served. Provide with pressure sensitive release for manual release, double wall galvanized steel insulated door having handle, chain retainer, and gasket.

3. Manufacturer: Provide duct access doors by Air Balance Inc.; Duro Dyne Corp.; Register &

Grille Mfg. Co., Inc.; Ruskin Mfg. Co.; Ventfabrics, Inc.; or Zurn Industries, Inc., Air Systems Div.

J. Flexible Duct Connections: Provide flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to fans,

air handlers, other vibration isolated equipment or crosses a building expansion joint. Construct flexible connections of neoprene-coated flameproof fabric crimped into duct flanges for attachment to duct and equipment. Make airtight joint. Provide adequate joint flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional movement, and also capable of absorbing vibrations of connected equipment. Provide rubber exterior finish for connections exposed to weather or high moisture conditions. Flexible connections on heating and cooling air systems shall be insulated type with 1" thick fiberglass insulation in-fill. Provide flexible connections by Duro Dyne Corp.; or Ventfabrics, Inc.

2.3. DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES (S):

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard commercial grade diffusers, registers and grilles of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, with accessories indicated, and as required for complete installation. See schedule on drawings.



B. Performance: Provide diffusers, registers and grilles that have, as minimum, air volume, velocity, throw, pressure drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device listed in manufacturer's current data.

C. Ceiling, Wall and Sill Compatibility: Provide diffusers, registers and grilles with border styles that

are compatible with adjacent ceiling, wall or sill systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit construction with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling and wall systems which will contain each type of device. Finish shall be off-white baked enamel for ceiling-mounted devices and prime finish suitable for field painting for wall-mounted devices, unless noted otherwise.

D. Square and Rectangular Diffusers: Provide square and rectangular diffusers of steel construction

with diffuser core removable from frame, available in 1, 2, 3, or 4 way throw pattern as indicated. Provide diffuser with opposed blade volume damper, of same material as diffuser, adjustable from diffuser face and straightening grid for field installation in the duct. Where indicated on the plans, provide factory-furnished internal air pattern baffles to convert a 4-way diffuser to a 2 or 3-way type while retaining the 4-way diffuser appearance.

E. Supply Registers: Provide double deflection type supply registers with individually adjustable

vertical deflection vanes in front and horizontal deflection vanes behind providing maximum air pattern flexibility; deflection vanes easily set without the use of tools. Construct registers of steel with vanes set on not more than 1/2 inch centers. Provide opposed blade volume damper adjustable through face with screwdriver, allen wrench, or removable key.

R. Ceiling Supply Registers: Provide single deflection type supply register with curved, individually

adjustable vanes to provide maximum air deflection flexibility; deflection vanes easily set without the use of tools. Construct registers of extruded aluminum. Provide opposed blade damper, adjustable through face with screwdriver, allen wrench, or removable key. Furnish with off-white finish.

S. Exhaust and Return Registers: Provide registers the same as supply registers except with a single

set of fixed horizontal vanes set at a 30° angle.

T. Grilles: Provide grilles the same as registers except without volume damper.

X. Manufacturer: Provide diffusers. registers, and grilles by Acutherm, Inc.; Barber-Colman Co.; Carnes Co., Div. of Wehr Corp.; Krueger Mfg. Co.; Titus Products Div., Philips Industries, Inc. or Tuttle & Bailey, Div. of Interpace Corp.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK:

A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," manufacturer's instructions, and recognized industry practices which will achieve air-tight (1/2% leakage for systems rated 3" and under); (1% for systems rated over 3") and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts true-to-shape and to prevent buckling. Support vertical ducts at every floor. Low pressure supply, return and exhaust branch ductwork shall attach to main using 45° entry fitting with manual volume damper located downstream of the take-off. Conical spin-in fittings with adjustable damper may be used in lieu of 45º entry fittings for round duct runouts to single diffusers or register. Where the indicated duct dimensions are not of



sufficient size to accommodate a conical spin-in duct collar, use high efficiency 45° entry style rectangular to round connectors with adjustable dampers. All seams and joints on supply, return and exhaust ducts shall be sealed airtight with duct joint sealant, except where a self-sealing duct system is used.

B. Inserts: Install concrete inserts for support of ductwork in coordination with formwork, as required

to avoid delays in work.

C. Field Fabrication: Complete fabrication of work at project site as necessary to match shop-fabrication work and accommodate installation requirements.

D. Routing: Locate ductwork runs vertically and horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever

possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and notations on Contract Drawings allowing for offsets of transitions which may not be indicated. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1" clearance outside of insulation. In finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work. Notify Architect of all items obstructing the installation of ductwork and air devices as indicated.

E. Electrical and Elevator Equipment Spaces and Required Clearances: Do not route ductwork through

transformer vaults and other similar electrical equipment spaces or through elevator equipment rooms unless duct serves such spaces. Ductwork shall be off-set as needed so as to not be routed directly over electrical panels and switchgear.

F. Penetrations: Where ducts pass through partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view,

conceal space between construction opening and duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gauge as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2". Fasten to duct and substrate.

G. Coordination: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil frames,

equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system.

H. Leakage Tests: Each duct system which is constructed for duct classes + 2" and over shall be tested for duct leakage in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. Repair leaks and repeat tests until total leakage is less than 1/2 of 1% of system design air flow.

3.2. INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES:

A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with

applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function.

B. Install turning vanes in all square or rectangular 90º elbows in supply, return and exhaust air

systems. Ducts with primary dimension larger than 24 inches shall have airfoil type turning vanes.

C. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either side, except outside only where duct is too small for person to enter. Access doors shall be installed at all automatic dampers, fire and smoke dampers, coils, thermostats, and at all other locations where service or inspection is required.

D. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of ductwork

accessories properly with other work.



E. Install ductwork supports and hangers in accordance with SMACNA standards, including hanger type, size, spacing, and method of attachment. Strap supports which anchor to the sides of ductwork without extending a maximum of 1" across the bottom of the duct are unacceptable.

F. Provide flexible connections at every duct connection to fans, air handlers, and other vibration

isolated equipment. Provide flexible duct connection at all building expansion joints. Provide connection of sufficient length to eliminate vibration transmission.

G. Install flexible ducts in accordance with Section III of SMACNA's, "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards, Metal and Flexible". Maximum flexible duct length shall not exceed 5 feet. When longer lengths are indicated, use rigid metal ducts of the same diameter to extend outlet to within the 5 feet length limit.

H. Test ports shall be furnished and installed by the sheet metal fabricator, at locations as required by

the TAB Engineer.

3.3. INSTALLATION OF DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES:

A. General: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended functions.

B. Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction drawings.

Locate units in center or quarter point of acoustical ceiling modules unless specifically shown otherwise on reflected ceiling plan.

C. Support diffusers, registers and grilles independently of the ceiling system except where lay-in

ceilings are used, support diffusers from ceiling grid, not ceiling tile. (As a Contractor option, a 1/2-inch thickness of fire-rated plywood may be bonded to the ceiling tile using panel adhesive, and the diffuser installed using the tile/plywood panel as the sole diffuser support. This option could speed up installation and reduce tile breakage.)

D. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles flush with adjoining surface. Repair any scratches or damage

to finish during installation using factory-supplied touch-up paint or replace item.

3.4. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:

A. Clean ductwork internally, unit by unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration.

B. Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-

up paint.

C. Adjust ductwork accessories, diffusers and registers for proper settings, install fusible links in fire dampers and adjust for proper action.

D. Label access doors.

E. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution

devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until such time as the connections are to be completed.



3.5 SPARE PARTS:

A. Furnish to Owner, with receipt, 3 operating keys for each type of air outlet and inlet that require them; obtain receipt.




PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS 237413 - 1

SECTION 237413 - PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Gas-fired furnace section construction shall be in accordance with AGA safety standards. Furnace section shall bear the AGA label.

B. Testing and rating of packaged rooftop units of 135,000 btu/hr capacity or over shall be in

accordance with ARI 340/360 "Standard for Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment".

C. Testing and rating of packaged rooftop units under 135,000 btu/hr capacity shall be in accordance

with ARI 210/240 "Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment", and provide Certified Rating Seal. Sound testing and rating of units shall be in accordance with ARI 270 "Standard for Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment". Units shall bear Certified Rating Seal.

D. Refrigerating system construction of packaged rooftop units shall be in accordance with ASHRAE

15 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration".

E. Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER) of packaged rooftop units shall be equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1 "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings".

F. Packaged rooftop units shall be listed by UL and have UL label as a unit.

G. Rooftop units shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL requirements.

1.2. EXTENDED WARRANTY: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer, agreeing to

replace/repair, within warranty period, compressors and heat exchangers with inadequate and defective materials and workmanship, including leakage, breakage, improper assembly, or failure to perform as required, provided manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining units have been adhered to during warranty period. Warranty period shall be 5 years from date of substantial completion and shall include the cost of replacement or repair of defective parts only.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS (LESS THAN 20 TONS) (S) (O/M):

A. General: Units shall be factory-assembled and tested, designed for roof or slab installation, and consisting of compressors, condenser, and evaporator coils, condenser and evaporator fans, refrigeration and temperature controls, heating section, filters, and dampers. Capacities shall be scheduled on the Drawings.

B. Casing: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel or aluminum casing construction, having

corrosion protection coating, and exterior finish. Casings shall have removable panels or access doors for inspection and access to internal parts, a minimum of 1-1/2" thick neoprene coated fiberglass insulation in the evaporator section, knockouts for electrical and piping connections and an exterior condensate drain connection and lifting lugs.




C. Evaporator Fans: Forward-curved, centrifugal, belt-driven fans with adjustable sheaves or direct-driven fans; and permanently lubricated fan and motor bearings. Provide motor with thermal overload protection. Mount motor and fan assembly on spring isolators.

D. Condenser Fans: Propeller-type, direct-driven fans, statically and dynamically balanced. Provide

weatherproof, permanently lubricated motor with thermal overload protection.

E. Coils: Evaporator and condenser coils shall be aluminum plate fin and seamless copper tube type. Fins shall have collars drawn, belled and firmly bonded to the tubes by means of mechanical expansion of the tubes. No soldering or tinning shall be used in the bonding process. Coils shall have a galvanized steel casing. Coils shall be mounted in the coil casing with same end connections accessible for service. Coils shall be removable from the unit through the roof or through the piping enclosure. Coil section shall be completely insulated. Evaporator coils shall have an equalizing type vertical distributor to ensure each coil circuit receives the same amount of refrigerant. Coils shall be leak (225 psig) tested with air pressure under water, then cleaned, dehydrated, and sealed with a holding charge of nitrogen. Provide sloped condensate drain pans under evaporator coils.

F. Compressors: Serviceable, semi-hermetic, or fully hermetic compressors, complete with integral

vibration isolators, internal overcurrent and overtemperature protection, internal pressure relief, centrifugal oil pump, and crankcase heaters.

G. Safety controls: Provide manual reset type for low pressure cutout; high pressure cutout; and

compressor motor overload protection.

H. Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard construction for gas- fired heat exchangers and burners. Provide unit with the following controls: redundant gas valve; intermittent pilot ignition; electronic spark ignition system; high limit cutout; and forced draft proving switch.

I. Outside Air Dampers: Provide motorized low leakage outside air dampers capable of adjustment up

to 100% of total supply air. Dampers shall be controlled by unit and occupancy controls, and shall be fully closed when the unit fan is de-energized.

J. Economizer Control: Provide outdoor air intake hood, return and outside air dampers, fully

modulating electric control system with enthalpy control, and adjustable mixed-air thermostat. System shall have 100 percent outside air capability with barometric relief and minimum outside air position setpoint capability. Outside air dampers shall be fully closed during unoccupied time periods. Provide automatic changeover through adjustable enthalpy control device.

K. Filters: Provide 2" thick 25% efficient pleated media type panel filters in galvanized steel filter

rack. Access to filter shall be through hinged access doors or lift-out panels. N. Unit Temperature Controls: 1. Provide unit with unit mounted solid-state control board providing micro-processor controls

for all 24 volt control functions. The resident control algorithms shall make all heating, cooling and/or ventilating decisions in response to electronic signals from sensors measuring indoor and outdoor temperatures and humidity. The control algorithm shall maintain accurate temperature control and minimize drift from set point.

2. DDC Temperature Control: Provide stand-alone control module providing interface between

unit microprocessor controls and DDC temperature control system. Control module shall be compatible with the existing ATC/BMS .




O. Accessories: Provide the following:

1. Low head pressure control, designed to operate at temperatures down to 0ºF (-18ºC).

2. Power exhaust fan.

3. Time delay relay on all multiple compressor units.

4. Install anti-recycling timers on all compressors to provide a minimum off time of five minutes

(field adjustable) between compressor cycling.

5. Single point power connection with unit-mounted fused disconnect switch and control-circuit transformer with built-in circuit breaker.

P. Manufacturers: Provide packaged rooftop air conditioning units by Aaon, Inc.; Carrier Air

Conditioning Div. of United Technologies, Inc.; Lennox Industries, Inc.; McQuay Air Conditioning Group, McQuay, Inc.; or Trane Co., Div. of American Standard, Inc.

2.2. PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS (20 TONS AND LARGER) (S) (O/M):

A. General: Units shall be factory-assembled and tested, piped, internally wired with single-point

power connection, fully charged with refrigerant, compressor oil, and shipped in one piece. Provide units designed for roof installation on a full roof curb and consisting of compressors, condenser and evaporator coils, condenser and evaporator fans, exhaust/return fans, refrigeration and temperature controls, filters,and dampers. Capacities are scheduled on the Drawings.

B. Casing: Manufacturer's standard casing construction, heavy gauge galvanized steel having

corrosion protection coating, and exterior baked-on enamel finish. Casings shall have hinged access doors for inspection and access to refrigeration components, compressor, supply air fan, and exhaust/return air fan. Hinged access panels with tiebacks to secure door in open position shall provide access to filter section. Unit control panel shall be accessible through hinged access panel with quick release latches. All access doors and panels shall have neoprene or vinyl gaskets. Interior surfaces or exterior casing members in contact with airstream shall have a minimum 1-1/2" thick neoprene coated fiberglass insulation. One-piece roof assembly curved for natural drainage shall have modified lock seam joints filled with sealant over all but condenser section. Drains shall be provided on each side of the condenser section. Unit base shall be watertight with minimum 14-gauge formed load bearing members, formed recess with factory-installed flexible base-to-curb sealing gasketing and curb overhang.

C. Evaporator Fans: Provide double inlet, forward curved, backward inclined, or airfoil type

centrifugal fans mounted on common shaft with adjustable sheave belt drive. After final air balancing is completed, the adjustable sheave shall be replaced with a fixed sheave of proper size. Adjustable sheave shall be turned over to Owner's representative. All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and tested in factory. Supply fan shall be test run in unit as part of unit test. Fan shaft shall be mounted on two grease-lubricated ball bearings designed for minimum 200,000 hours average life. Provide 1800 rpm, open dripproof motor with re-greasable ball bearings. Fan motor and fan assembly shall be mounted on common base to allow consistent belt tension with no relative motion between fan and motor shafts. Entire assembly shall be completely isolated from unit by double deflection, spring isolators having 2 inch deflection.




D. Condenser Fans: Provide vertical discharge, steel, direct-drive fans, statically and dynamically balanced. Provide weatherproof three-phase motors with permanently lubricated ball bearings, and built-in current and thermal overload protection.

E. Exhaust/return Fan: Provide double inlet, forward curved, backward inclined, or airfoil type

centrifugal fans mounted on common shaft with adjustable sheave or variable frequency drive. Mount fan shaft on two grease lubricated ball bearings designed for minimum 200,000-hour average life. Provide 1800 rpm, open dripproof motor with re-greasable ball bearings. Fan motor and assembly-mounted on common base to allow consistent belt tension with no relative motion between fan and motor shafts. Entire assembly completely isolated from unit and fan board by double deflection, rubber-in-shear or spring isolators on motor sizes larger than two HP.

F. Coils: Aluminum plate fin and seamless copper tube type. Fins shall have collars drawn, belled and

firmly bonded to the tubes by means of mechanical expansion of the tubes. No soldering or tinning shall be used in the bonding process. Coils shall have a galvanized steel casing. Coils shall be mounted in the coil casing with same end connections accessible for service. Coils shall be removable from the unit through the roof or through the piping enclosure. Coil section shall be completely insulated.

1. Refrigerant Coils: Evaporator coil shall be equalizing type vertical distributor to ensure each

coil circuit receives the same amount of refrigerant. Condensing coils shall be provided with a sub-cooling circuit with liquid accumulator. Coils shall be leak (300 psig) tested with air pressure under water, then cleaned, dehydrated, and sealed with a holding charge of nitrogen.

G. Compressors: Serviceable, semi-hermetic reciprocating compressors with integral vibration

isolators, internal overcurrent and overtemperature protection, internal pressure relief, and crankcase heaters which de- energize during compressor operation. Units shall also have cylinder unloaders for capacity control, with minimum steps as scheduled; hot-gas bypass valve and piping for variable air volume systems; thermal expansion valves, filter dryers, sight glasses, compressor service valves, liquid line service valves; minimum of 2 refrigerant circuits for units having 2 or more compressors; and fan-cycling control for low ambient control to 35ºF (2ºC).

H. Safety Controls: Provide low pressure cutout, manual reset; high pressure cutout, manual reset;

compressor motor overload protection, manual re-set; anti-recycling timing device; adjustable low-ambient lockout; and oil pressure switch.

I. Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard construction for gas- fired heat exchangers and burners

of aluminized-steel, designed for natural gas. Provide fully modulating gas valve with turn-down ratio of at least 4:1. Provide single gas connection and the following control devices: redundant gas valves; intermittent pilot ignition; electronic spark ignition system; high limit cutout; forced draft proving switch; and flame roll-out switch.

J. Outside Air Dampers: Provide motorized low leakage outside air dampers capable of adjustment up

to 100% of total supply air. Dampers shall be controlled by unit and occupancy controls, and shall be fully closed when the unit fan is de-energized.

K. Filters Section:

1. Provide disposable, 2-inch thick, 25% minimum efficiency, pleated media, glass fiber type

panel filters rated in accordance with ASHRAE Std. 52-76. Maximum filter section face velocity shall be 350 fpm. Filters shall slide into filter rack through hinged side access doors or removable panels.




2. Filters shall slide into filter rack through hinged side access doors or removable panels.

L. Economizer control: Provide return and outside air dampers, fully modulating electric control

system with enthalpy control, and adjustable mixed-air thermostat. System shall have 100 percent outside air capability. Provide automatic changeover through adjustable enthalpy control device.

M. Electrical: Units shall have a 115V AC convenience outlet, separately fused, for unit service. Unit

power connection shall be either through unit cabinet or within roof curb perimeter.

N. Unit Temperature Controls: 1. Provide unit with unit mounted solid-state control board providing micro-processor controls

for all 24 volt control functions. The resident control algorithms shall make all heating, cooling and/or ventilating decisions in response to electronic signals from sensors measuring indoor and outdoor temperatures and humidity. The control algorithm shall maintain accurate temperature control and minimize drift from set point.

2. DDC Temperature Control: Provide stand-alone control module providing interface between

unit microprocessor controls and DDC temperature control system. Control module shall be compatible with existing ATC/BMS system.

3. Accessories:

1. Remote Control Panel: Furnish panel for remote mounting containing control of heating,

cooling, evaporator fan, and outdoor damper; and indicator lights for up to 6 unit functions.

2. Anti-recycling control to automatically prevent compressor restart for 5-minutes after shutdown.

3. Low ambient head pressure control, designed to operate at temperatures down to 0ºF (-18ºC).

4. Unit-mounted non-fused disconnect switch.

R. Manufacturers: Provide packaged rooftop air conditioning units by Aaon, Inc.; Carrier Air

Conditioning Div. of Carrier Corp.; McQuay Air Conditioning Group, McQuay, Inc.; Trane Co., Div. of American Standard, Inc.; or York, Div. of York Corp.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION:

A. General: Install rooftop units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Unit shall be interfaced with the Building Management System for pressure, temperature and compressor monitoring as well as start-stop and morning warm-up damper control. Packaged equipment supplier shall provide wiring diagrams to controls contractor and shall obtain controls shop drawing detailing interconnections. Equipment warranty shall be unaffected by its interface with the BMS or adjustable frequency drive control.




B. Support: Install and secure roof curb to roof structure, in accordance with National Roofing Contractor's Association (NRCA) installation recommendations and shop drawings. Install and secure rooftop units on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing.

C. Electrical Connections: Refer to ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT for final

connections to equipment and installation of loose shipped electrical components.

D. Install all controls and accessories.

3.2. START-UP SERVICES: Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative to start-up rooftop units, in accordance with manufacturer's written start-up instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.3. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING: Provide services of manufacturer's service

representative to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of rooftop units. Training shall include start-up and shut-down, servicing and preventative maintenance schedule and procedures, and troubleshooting procedures plus procedures for obtaining repair parts and technical assistance.

3.4. EXTRA MATERIALS: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, the following spare parts for each packaged

rooftop unit: One extra set of matched belts for each belt-driven fan; and one extra set of filters for each unit.




VARIABLE REFRIGERANT SYSTEM 238126 - 1

SECTION 238126 –VARIABLE REFRIGERANT SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The variable capacity, heat pump heat recovery air conditioning system shall be a Mitsubishi Electric CITY MULTI VRFZ (Variable Refrigerant Flow Zoning).

The R2-Series system shall consist of a PURY outdoor unit, BC (Branch Circuit) Controller, multiple indoor units, and M-NET DDC (Direct Digital Controls). Each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall be capable of operating in any mode independently of other indoor units or groups. System shall be capable of changing mode (cooling to heating, heating to cooling) with no interruption to system operation. To ensure owner comfort, each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall be independently controlled and capable of changing mode automatically when zone temperature strays 1.8 degrees F from set point for ten minutes. The sum of connected capacity of all indoor air handlers shall range from 50% to 150% of outdoor rated capacity.


A. The units shall be listed by Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label.

B. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (N.E.C.).

C. The units shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001 and ISO14001 which is a set of standards applying to environmental protection set by the International Standard Organization (ISO).

D. All units must meet or exceed the 2010 Federal minimum efficiency requirements and the proposed ASHRAE 90.1 efficiency requirements for VRF systems. Efficiency shall be published in accordance with the DOE alternative test procedure, which is based on the Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI) Standards 340/360, 1230 and ISO Standard 13256-1.

E. A full charge of R-410A for the condensing unit only shall be provided in the condensing unit.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Unit shall be stored and handled according to the manufacturer’s recommendation.

1.4 CONTROLS

A. The control system shall consist of a low voltage communication network of unitary built-in controllers with on-board communications and a web-based operator interface. A web controller with a network interface card shall gather data from this system and generate web pages accessible through a conventional web browser on each PC connected to the network. Operators shall be able to perform all normal operator functions through the web browser interface.




B. System controls and control components shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written installation instructions.

C. Furnish energy conservation features such as optimal start, night setback, request-based logic, and demand level adjustment of overall system capacity as specified in the sequence.

D. System shall provide direct and reverse-acting on and off algorithms based on an input condition or group conditions to cycle a binary output or multiple binary outputs.

E. Provide capability for future system expansion to include monitoring and use of occupant card access, lighting control and general equipment control.

F. System shall be capable of email generation for remote alarm annunciation.

G. Control system start-up shall be a required service to be completed by the manufacturer or a duly authorized, competent representative that has been factory trained in Mitsubishi controls system configuration and operation. The representative shall provide proof of certification for Mitsubishi CMCN Essentials Training and/or CMCN Hands-On Training indicating successful completion of no more than two (2) years prior to system installation. This certification shall be included as part of the equipment and/or controls submittals. This service shall be equipment and system count dependent and shall be a minimum of one (1) eight (8) hour period to be completed during normal working hours.

PART 2 – WARRANTY

2.1 The units shall be covered by the manufacturer’s limited warranty for a period of five (5) year from date of installation.

The systems shall be:

1) designed by a certified CITY MULTI Diamond Designer,

2) installed by a contractor that has successfully completed the Mitsubishi

Electric three day service course, AND

3) verified with a completed commissioning report submitted to and approved

by the Mitsubishi Electric Service Department,

In addition the compressor shall have a manufacturer’s limited warranty for a period of seven (7) years from date of installation.

If, during this period, any part should fail to function properly due to defects in workmanship or material, it shall be replaced or repaired at the discretion of the manufacturer.

This warranty shall not include labor.

2.2 Manufacturer shall have a minimum of twenty-nine years of HVAC experience in the U.S. market.




2.3 All manufacturer technical and service manuals must be readily available for download by any local contractor should emergency service be required. Registering and sign-in requirements which may delay emergency service reference are not allowed.

2.4 The CITY MULTI VRFZ system shall be installed by a contractor with extensive CITY MULTI install and service training. The mandatory contractor service and install training should be performed by the manufacturer.

PART 3 – PRODUCTS

3.1 R2-SERIES OUTDOOR UNIT

A. General:

The R2-Series PURY outdoor unit shall be used specifically with CITY MULTI VRFZ components. The PURY outdoor units shall be equipped with multiple circuit boards that interface to the M-NET controls system and shall perform all functions necessary for operation. Each outdoor unit module shall be completely factory assembled, piped and wired and run tested at the factory.

1. All units requiring a factory supplied twinning kits shall be piped together in the field, without the need for equalizing line(s). If an alternate manufacturer is selected, any additional material, cost, and labor to install additional lines shall be incurred by the contractor.

2. Outdoor unit shall have a sound rating no higher than 60 dB(A) individually or 64 dB(A) twinned. Units shall have a sound rating no higher than 50 dB(A) individually or 53 dB(A) twinned while in night mode operation. If an alternate manufacturer is selected, any additional material, cost, and labor to meet published sound levels shall be incurred by the contractor.

3. Both refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the BC (Branch Circuit) Controller (Single or Main) shall be insulated.

4. There shall be no more than 3 branch circuit controllers connected to any one outdoor unit.

5. Outdoor unit shall be able to connect to up to 50 indoor units depending upon model.

6. The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator with refrigerant level sensors and controls.

7. The outdoor unit shall have a high pressure safety switch, over-current protection, crankcase heater and DC bus protection.

8. The outdoor unit shall have the ability to operate with a maximum height difference of 164 feet and have total refrigerant tubing length of 1804-2625 feet. The greatest length is not to exceed 541 feet between outdoor unit and the indoor units without the need for line size changes or traps.

9. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating in heating mode down to -4F ambient temperatures or cooling mode down to 23F ambient temperatures, without additional low ambient controls. If an alternate manufacturer is selected, any additional material, cost, and




labor to meet low ambient operating condition and performance shall be incurred by the contractor.

10. Manufacturer supplied low ambient kit shall be provided with predesigned control box rated for outdoor installation and capable of controlling kit operation automatically in all outdoor unit operation modes.

11. Manufacturer supplied low ambient kit shall be listed by Electrical Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label.

12. Manufacturer supplied low ambient kit shall be factory tested in low ambient temperature chamber to ensure operation. Factory performance testing data shall be available when requested.

13. The outdoor unit shall have a high efficiency oil separator plus additional logic controls to ensure adequate oil volume in the compressor is maintained.

14. Unit must defrost all circuits simultaneously in order to resume full heating more quickly. Partial defrost which may extend “no or reduced heating” periods shall not be allowed.

B. Unit Cabinet:

1. The casing(s) shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished. Units cabinets shall be able to withstand 960 hours per ASTM B117 criteria for seacoast protected models (–BS models)

C. Fan:

1. Each outdoor unit module shall be furnished with one direct drive, variable speed propeller type fan. The fan shall be factory set for operation under 0 in. WG external static pressure, but capable of normal operation under a maximum of 0.24 in. WG external static pressure via dipswitch.

2. All fan motors shall have inherent protection, have permanently lubricated bearings, and be completely variable speed.

3. All fan motors shall be mounted for quiet operation.

4. All fans shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent contact with moving parts.

5. The outdoor unit shall have vertical discharge airflow.

D. Refrigerant

1. R410A refrigerant shall be required for PURY-P-T/Y(S)KMU-A outdoor unit systems.

2. Polyolester (POE) oil shall be required. Prior to bidding, manufacturers using alternate oil types shall submit material safety data sheets (MSDS) and comparison of hygroscopic properties for




alternate oil with list of local suppliers stocking alternate oil for approval at least two weeks prior to bidding.

E. Coil:

1. The outdoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with lanced or corrugated plate fins on copper tubing.

2. The coil fins shall have a factory applied corrosion resistant blue-fin finish.

3. The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard.

4. Refrigerant flow from the outdoor unit shall be controlled by means of an inverter driven compressor.

5. The outdoor coil shall include 4 circuits with two position valves for each circuit, except for the last stage.

F. Compressor:

1. Each outdoor unit module shall be equipped with one inverter driven scroll hermetic compressor. Non inverter-driven compressors, which cause inrush current (demand charges) and require larger wire sizing, shall not be allowed.

2. A crankcase heater(s) shall be factory mounted on the compressor(s).

3. The outdoor unit compressor shall have an inverter to modulate capacity. The capacity shall be completely variable with a turndown of 19%-5% of rated capacity, depending upon unit size.

4. The compressor will be equipped with an internal thermal overload.

5. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration.

6. Field-installed oil equalization lines between modules are not allowed. Prior to bidding, manufacturers requiring equalization must submit oil line sizing calculations specific to each system and module placement for this project.

G. Controls:

1. The outdoor unit shall have the capability of up to 8 levels of demand control for each refrigerant system

H. Electrical:

1. The outdoor unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 3-phase, 60 hertz.

2. The outdoor unit shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz), 207-253V (230V/60Hz).

3. The outdoor unit shall be controlled by integral microprocessors.




4. The control circuit between the indoor units, BC Controller and the outdoor unit shall be 24VDC completed using a 2-conductor, twisted pair shielded cable to provide total integration of the system.

3.2 BRANCH CIRCUIT (BC) CONTROLLERS FOR R2-SERIES SYSTEMS

A. General

The BC (Branch Circuit) Controllers shall include multiple branches to allow simultaneous heating and cooling by allowing either hot gas refrigerant to flow to indoor unit(s) for heating or subcooled liquid refrigerant to flow to indoor unit(s) for cooling. Refrigerant used for cooling must always be subcooled for optimal indoor unit LEV performance; alternate branch devices with no subcooling risk bubbles in liquid supplied to LEV and are not allowed.

The BC (Branch Circuit) Controllers shall be specifically used with R410A R2-Series systems. These units shall be equipped with a circuit board that interfaces to the M-NET controls system and shall perform all functions necessary for operation. The unit shall have a galvanized steel finish. The BC Controller shall be completely factory assembled, piped and wired. Each unit shall be run tested at the factory. This unit shall be mounted indoors, with access and service clearance provided for each controller. The sum of connected capacity of all indoor air handlers shall range from 50% to 150% of rated capacity.

B. BC Unit Cabinet:

1. The casing shall be fabricated of galvanized steel.

2. Each cabinet shall house a liquid-gas separator and multiple refrigeration control valves.

3. The unit shall house two tube-in-tube heat exchangers.

C. Refrigerant

1. R410A refrigerant shall be required.

D. Refrigerant valves:

1. The unit shall be furnished with multiple branch circuits which can individually accommodate up to 54,000 BTUH and up to three indoor units. Branches may be twinned to allow more than 54,000 BTUH.

2. Each branch shall have multiple two-position valves to control refrigerant flow.

3. Service shut-off valves shall be field-provided/installed for each branch to allow service to any indoor unit without field interruption to overall system operation.

4. Linear electronic expansion valves shall be used to control the variable refrigerant flow.

E. Integral Drain Pan:

1. An Integral drain pan and drain shall be provided




F. Electrical:

1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 Hertz.

2. The unit shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 (230/60Hz).

3. The BC Controller shall be controlled by integral microprocessors

4. The control circuit between the indoor units and outdoor units shall be 24VDC completed using a 2-conductor, twisted pair shielded cable to provide total integration of the system.

3.3 PKFY (Wall Mounted) INDOOR UNIT

A. General:

The PKFY shall be a wall-mounted indoor unit section and shall have a modulating linear expansion device and a flat front. The PKFY shall be used with the R2-Series outdoor unit and BC Controller, Y-Series outdoor unit, or S-Series outdoor unit. The PKFY shall support individual control using M-NET DDC controllers.

B. Indoor Unit

The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, and a test run switch. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory.

C. Unit Cabinet:

1. All casings, regardless of model size, shall have the same white finish

2. Multi directional drain and refrigerant piping offering four (4) directions for refrigerant piping and two (2) directions for draining shall be standard.

3. There shall be a separate back plate which secures the unit firmly to the wall.

D. Fan:

1. The indoor fan shall be an assembly with one or two line-flow fan(s) direct driven by a single motor.

2. The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced to run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings.

3. A manual adjustable guide vane shall be provided with the ability to change the airflow from side to side (left to right).




4. A motorized air sweep louver shall provide an automatic change in airflow by directing the air up and down to provide uniform air distribution.

E. Filter:

1. Return air shall be filtered by means of an easily removable, washable filter.

F. Coil:

1. The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing.

2. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange.

3. All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy.

4. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory.

5. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil.

6. Both refrigerant lines to the PKFY indoor units shall be insulated.

G. Electrical:

1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz.

2. The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts (230V/60Hz)

H. Controls:

1. This unit shall use controls provided by Mitsubishi Electric Cooling & Heating to perform functions necessary to operate the system. Please refer to Part 4 of this guide specification for details on controllers and other control options.

2. The unit shall be able to control external backup heat.

3. The unit shall have a factory built in receiver for wireless remote control

4. Indoor unit shall compensate for the higher temperature sensed by the return air sensor compared to the temperature at level of the occupant when in HEAT mode. Disabling of compensation shall be possible for individual units to accommodate instances when compensation is not required.

5. Control board shall include contacts for control of external heat source. External heat may be energized as second stage with 1.8°F – 9.0°F adjustable deadband from set point.

6. Indoor unit shall include no less than four (4) digital inputs capable of being used for customizable control strategies.




7. Indoor unit shall include no less than three (3) digital outputs capable of being used for customizable control strategies.

8. Manufacturer to provide drain pan level sensor powered by a 20-year life lithium battery. Sensor shall require no external power for operation and shall have an audible indication of low battery condition.

9. The drain pan sensor shall provide protection against drain pan overflow by sensing a high condensate level in the drain pan. Should this occur the control shuts down the indoor unit before an overflow can occur. A thermistor error code will be produced should the sensor activate indicating a fault which must be resolved before the unit re-starts.

3.4 PLFY-P**NCMU-ER4 (4-WAY CEILING-RECESSED CASSETTE WITH GRILLE) INDOOR UNIT

A. General:

1. The PLFY-P**NCMU-ER4 shall be a four-way cassette style indoor unit that recesses into the ceiling with a ceiling grille. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, an emergency operation function and a test run switch. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory.

B. Unit Cabinet:

1. The cabinet shall be a compact 22-7/16” wide x 22-7/16” deep so it will fit within a standard 24” square suspended ceiling grid.

2. The cabinet panel shall have provisions for a field installed filtered outside air intake.

3. Four-way grille shall be fixed to bottom of cabinet allowing two, three or four-way blow.

C. Fan:

1. The indoor fan shall be an assembly with a turbo fan direct driven by a single motor.

2. The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced to run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings.

3. The indoor fan shall consist of three (3) speeds, Low, Mid, and High.

4. The indoor unit shall have an adjustable air outlet system offering 4-way airflow, 3-way airflow, or 2-way airflow.

5. The auto air swing vanes shall be capable of automatically swinging up and down for uniform air distribution.

D. Filter:




1. Return air shall be filtered by means of a long-life washable filter.

E. Coil:






6. The unit shall be provided with an integral condensate lift mechanism that will be able to raise drain water 19-3/4” inches above the condensate pan.

7. Both refrigerant lines to the PLFY indoor units shall be insulated.

F. Electrical:


2. The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts (230V/60Hz).

G. Controls:

1. This unit shall use controls provided by Mitsubishi Electric to perform functions necessary to operate the system.









7. The drain pan sensor shall provide protection against drain pan overflow by sensing a high condensate level in the drain pan. Should this occur the control shuts down the indoor unit before an overflow can occur. A thermistor error code will be produced should the sensor activate indicating a fault which must be resolved before the unit re-starts.

3.5 PEFY-NMAU (CEILING-CONCEALED DUCTED) INDOOR UNIT

A. General:

The PEFY shall be a ceiling-concealed ducted indoor fan coil design that mounts above the ceiling with a 2-position, field adjustable return and a fixed horizontal discharge supply and shall have a modulating linear expansion device. The PEFY shall be used with the R2-Series outdoor unit and BC Controller, Y-Series outdoor unit, or S-Series outdoor unit. The PEFY shall support individual control using M-NET DDC controllers.

B. Indoor Unit.

The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, and an auto restart function. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory.

C. Unit Cabinet:

1. The unit shall be, ceiling-concealed, ducted.

2. The cabinet panel shall have provisions for a field installed filtered outside air intake.

D. Fan:

1. PEFY-NMAU models shall feature external static pressure settings from 0.14 to 0.60 in. WG.

2. The indoor unit fan shall be an assembly with one or two Sirocco fan(s) direct driven by a single motor.

3. The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced and run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings.

4. The indoor fan shall consist of three (3) speeds, High, Mid, and Low plus the Auto-Fan function

5. The indoor unit shall have a ducted air outlet system and ducted return air system.

E. Filter:

1. Return air shall be filtered by means of a standard factory installed return air filter.

2. Optional return filter box (rear or bottom placement) with high-efficiency filter shall be available for all PEFY indoor units.




F. Coil:






6. The condensate shall be gravity drained from the fan coil.

7. Both refrigerant lines to the PEFY indoor units shall be insulated.

G. Electrical:


2. The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts (230V/60Hz).

H. Controls:

1. This unit shall use controls provided by Mitsubishi Electric Cooling & Heating to perform functions necessary to operate the system. Please refer to Part 5 of this guide specification for details on controllers and other control options.






7. The drain pan sensor shall provide protection against drain pan overflow by sensing a high condensate level in the drain pan. Should this occur the control shuts down the indoor unit




before an overflow can occur. A thermistor error code will be produced should the sensor activate indicating a fault which must be resolved before the unit re-starts.

PART 4 – CONTROLS

4.1 Overview A. General:

The CITY MULTI Controls Network (CMCN) shall be capable of supporting remote controllers, centralized controllers, an integrated web based interface, graphical user workstation, and system integration to Building Management Systems via BACnet® and LonWorks®. The system shall fully integrate with the existing Mitsubishi TG2000 system.

4.2 Electrical Characteristics A. General:

The CMCN shall operate at 24VDC. Controller power and communications shall be via a common non-polar communications bus.

B. Wiring:

1. Control wiring shall be installed in a daisy chain configuration from indoor unit to ME remote controller to indoor unit, to the BC controller (main and subs, if applicable) and to the outdoor unit. Control wiring to remote controllers shall be run from the indoor unit terminal block to the controller associated with that unit.

2. Control wiring for centralized controllers shall be installed in a daisy chain configuration from outdoor unit to outdoor unit, to the system controllers (centralized controllers and/or integrated web based interface), to the power supply.

3. Control wiring for the Backlit MA, Deluxe MA, Simple MA, and Wireless MA remote controllers shall be from the remote controller to the first associated indoor unit (TB-15) then to the remaining associated indoor units (TB-15) in a daisy chain configuration.

4. The AG-150, GB-50ADA, GB-24 centralized controller shall be capable of being networked with other AG-150, GB-50ADA and GB-24 centralized controllers for centralized control.

C. Wiring type:

1. Wiring shall be 2-conductor (16 AWG), twisted, stranded, shielded wire as defined by the Diamond System Builder output.

2. Network wiring shall be CAT-5e with RJ-45 connection.

4.3 CITY MULTI Controls Network The CITY MULTI Controls Network (CMCN) consists of remote controllers, centralized controllers, and/or integrated web based interface communicating over a high-speed communication bus. The CITY MULTI Controls Network shall support operation monitoring, scheduling, error email distribution, personal web browsers, tenant billing, online maintenance support, and integration with Building




Management Systems (BMS) using either LonWorks® or BACnet® interfaces. The below figure illustrates a sample CMCN System Configuration.

A. CMCN System Configuration CMCN: Remote ControllersRCe Deluxe MA Remote Controller (PAR-21MAAU)

The Deluxe MA Remote Controller (PAR-21MAAU) shall be capable of controlling up to 16 indoor units (defined as 1 group). The Deluxe MA Remote Controller shall be approximately 5” x 5” in size and white in color with a light-green LCD display. The Deluxe MA Remote Controller shall support a selection from multiple languages (Spanish, German, Japanese, Chinese, English, Russian, Italian, or French) for display information. The Deluxe MA supports temperature display selection of Fahrenheit or Celsius. The Deluxe MA Remote Controller shall control the following grouped operations: On/Off, Operation Mode (cool, heat, auto (R2/WR2-Series Simultaneous Heating and Cooling only), dry, and fan), temperature set point, fan speed setting, and airflow direction setting. The Deluxe MA Remote Controller shall support timer settings of on/off/temperature up to 8 times in a day in 1-minute increments. The Deluxe MA Remote Controller shall support an Auto Off timer. The Deluxe MA Remote Controller shall be able to limit the set temperature range from the Deluxe MA. The room temperature shall be sensed at either the Deluxe MA Remote Controller or the Indoor Unit dependent on the indoor unit dipswitch setting. The Deluxe MA Remote Controller shall display a four-digit error code in the event of system abnormality or error.

The Deluxe MA Remote Controller shall only be used in the same group with other Deluxe MA Remote Controllers (PAR-21MAAU), Wireless MA (PAR-FL32MA / PAR-FA32MA), or Simple M Remote Controllers (PAC-YT53CRAU), with up to two remote controllers per group.

The Deluxe MA Remote Controller shall require no addressing. The Deluxe MA Remote Controller shall connect using two-wire, stranded, non-polar control wire to the TB15 connection terminal on the indoor unit. The PAR-21MAAU shall require cross-over wiring for grouping across indoor units.

PAR-21MAAU (Deluxe MA Remote Controller) Item Description Operation Display

ON/OFF Run and stop operation for a single group Each Group

Each Group

Operation Mode

Switches between Cool/Dry/Auto/Fan/Heat.

Operation modes vary depending on the air conditioner unit. Auto mode is in the R2/WR2-Series only.

Each Group

Each Group

Temperature Setting

Sets the temperature from 57°F – 87°F depending on operation mode and indoor unit.

Each Group

Each Group

Fan Speed Setting

Hi/Mid-2/Mid-1/Low/Auto

Available fan speed settings depending on indoor unit.

Each Group

Each Group





Air Flow Direction Setting

Air flow direction angles (4 or 5 angle Swing) Auto

Louver ON/OFF

Air flow direction settings vary depending on the indoor unit model.

Each Group

Each Group

Weekly Timer ON/OFF/Temperature setting can be done up to 8 times one day in the week. The time can be set by the 1-minute interval.

Each Group

Each Group

Permit / Prohibit Local Operation

Individually prohibit operation of each local remote control function (Start/Stop, Change operation mode, Set temperature, Reset filter).

*1: Centrally Controlled is displayed on the remote controller for prohibited functions.

N/A Each Group

*1

Prohibition / Permission of Specified Mode

Setting via the System Controller, the operation for the following modes is prohibited:

Cooling Prohibited: Cool, Dry, Auto

Heating Prohibited: Heat, Auto

Cooling-Heating Prohibited: Cool, Heat, Dry, Auto

N/A Each Group

Display Indoor Unit Intake Temp

Measures and displays the intake temperature of the indoor unit when the indoor unit is operating.

N/A Each Group

Error When an error is currently occurring on an air conditioner unit, the afflicted unit and the error code are displayed

N/A Each Unit

Test Run Operates air conditioner units in test run mode. Each Group

Each Group

Ventilation Equipment

Up to 16 indoor units can be connected to an interlocked system that has one LOSSNAY unit. LOSSNAY items that can be set are “Hi”, “Low”, and “Stop”. Ventilation mode switching is not available.

Each Group

Each Group

Set Temperature Range Limit

Set temperature range limit for cooling, heating, or auto mode. Each Group

Each Group





Auto Lock Out Function

Locking of all buttons -Or- Locking of all buttons except ON/OFF button

Each Group

Each Group

Venture Architects, LLC Crystal Springs Elementary School

Improvements Project Roanoke City Public Schools

ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 26 0501 - 1

SECTION 26 0501

ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Electrical demolition.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual sections.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings.

B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.

C. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.

D. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings to be removed.

B. Coordinate utility service outages with utility company.

C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use

personnel experienced in such operations.

D. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and

connections. Minimize outage duration.

1. Obtain permission from Owner at least 72 hours before partially or completely

disabling system.

E. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is accepted. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize outage

duration.

1. Notify Owner before partially or completely disabling system.

2. Make notifications at least 72 hours in advance.

3.03 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Perform work for removal and disposal of equipment and materials containing toxic substances regulated under the Federal Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA) in

accordance with applicable federal, state, and local regulations. Applicable equipment and materials include, but are not limited to:

1. Mercury-containing lamps and tubes, including fluorescent lamps, high intensity

discharge (HID), arc lamps, ultra-violet, high pressure sodium, mercury vapor,

ignitron tubes, neon, and incandescent.

B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.

C. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.

ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 26 0501 - 2

D. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible

ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.

E. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit

servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets that are not removed.

F. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment

that has been removed.

G. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension

work.

H. Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modify installation

or provide access panel as appropriate.

I. Extend existing installations using materials and methods as specified.

3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIR

A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment that remain or that are to be reused.

B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions.

Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.

C. Luminaires: Remove existing luminaires for cleaning. Use mild detergent to clean all

exterior and interior surfaces; rinse with clean water and wipe dry. Replace lamps, ballasts and broken electrical parts.

END OF SECTION



LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL

POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

26 0519 - 3

SECTION 26 0519

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Single conductor building wire.

B. Wiring connectors.

C. Electrical tape.

D. Heat shrink tubing.

E. Wire pulling lubricant.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.

B. Section 26 0501 - Electrical Demolition: Disconnection, removal, and/or extension of existing

electrical conductors and cables.

C. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Additional requirements for grounding conductors and grounding connectors.

D. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2013.

B. ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard,

Medium-Hard, or Soft; 2011.

C. ASTM B33 - Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes; 2010 (Reapproved 2014).

D. ASTM B787/B787M - Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded

Copper Conductors for Subsequent Insulation; 2004 (Reapproved 2014).

E. ASTM D3005 - Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic

Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape; 2010.

F. ASTM D4388 - Standard Specification for Nonmetallic Semi-Conducting and Electrically

Insulating Rubber Tapes; 2013.


26 0519 - 4

G. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical

Contractors Association; 2010.

H. NEMA WC 70 - Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical

Energy; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2009 (ANSI/NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-

95-658).

I. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2013 (ANSI/NETA ATS).

J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition

Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

K. UL 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

L. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

M. UL 486A-486B - Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

N. UL 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

O. UL 486D - Sealed Wire Connector Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

P. UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under other

sections with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.

2. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide

terminations suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain

direction before proceeding with work.


A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a

Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install or otherwise handle thermoplastic-insulated conductors at temperatures lower

than 14 degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's instructions. When installation

below this temperature is unavoidable, notify Architect and obtain direction before proceeding

with work.


26 0519 - 5

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS

A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and

product listing.

B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated,

permitted, or required.

C. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is not permitted.

D. Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable is not permitted.

E. Service entrance cable is not permitted.

F. Armored cable is not permitted.

G. Metal-clad cable is not permitted.

2.2 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,

connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system.

D. Comply with NEMA WC 70.

E. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83.

F. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44.

G. Conductor Material:

1. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this

project. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper.

2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper

conductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B 787M unless

otherwise indicated.

3. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33.

H. Minimum Conductor Size:

1. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG.

a. Exceptions:

1) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop.

2. Control Circuits: 14 AWG.


26 0519 - 6

I. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than

applicable minimum size requirements specified.

J. Conductor Color Coding:

1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having

jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.

2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation.

a. Conductors size 4 AWG and larger may have black insulation color coded using

vinyl color coding electrical tape.

3. Color Code:

a. 208Y/120 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:

1) Phase A: Black.

2) Phase B: Red.

3) Phase C: Blue.

4) Neutral/Grounded: White.

b. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green.

c. For modifications or additions to existing wiring systems, comply with existing

color code when existing code complies with NFPA 70 and is approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

d. For control circuits, comply with manufacturer's recommended color code.

2.3 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE

A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.

B. Conductor Stranding:

1. Feeders and Branch Circuits:

a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.

b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.

D. Insulation:

1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN or THHN/THWN-2, except as indicated

below.

a. Size 4 AWG and Larger: Type XHHW-2.

b. Installed on roof: Type XHHW-2.


26 0519 - 7

2.4 WIRING CONNECTORS

A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C as

applicable.

B. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: Comply with Section 26 0526.

C. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps:

1. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist-on insulated spring connectors.

2. Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression

connectors.

D. Wiring Connectors for Terminations:

1. Where over-sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can

accommodate, provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not less

than required for the rating of the overcurrent protective device.

2. Provide motor pigtail connectors for connecting motor leads in order to facilitate

disconnection.

3. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression

connectors where connectors are required.

4. Conductors for Control Circuits: Use crimped terminals for all connections.

E. Do not use insulation-piercing or insulation-displacement connectors designed for use with

conductors without stripping insulation.

F. Do not use push-in wire connectors as a substitute for twist-on insulated spring connectors.

G. Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F for standard applications

and 302 degrees F for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealant and listed as

complying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations.

1. Manufacturers:

a. 3M: www.3m.com.

b. Ideal Industries, Inc: www.idealindustries.com.

c. NSI Industries LLC: www.nsiindustries.com.

H. Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set-screw type.

I. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration.

J. Crimped Terminals: Nylon-insulated, with insulation grip and terminal configuration suitable

for connection to be made.

2.5 WIRING ACCESSORIES

A. Electrical Tape:


26 0519 - 8

1. Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Integrally colored to match color code indicated;

listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221

degrees F.

2. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying

with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; conformable for application down to 0 degrees F and suitable for continuous temperature

environment up to 221 degrees F.

3. Rubber Splicing Electrical Tape: Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR) tape, complying with ASTM D4388; minimum thickness of 30 mil; suitable for continuous temperature

environment up to 194 degrees F and short-term 266 degrees F overload service.

4. Electrical Filler Tape: Rubber-based insulating moldable putty, minimum thickness of

125 mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 176 degrees F.

5. Varnished Cambric Electrical Tape: Cotton cambric fabric tape, with or without

adhesive, oil-primed and coated with high-grade insulating varnish; minimum thickness

of 7 mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F.

6. Moisture Sealing Electrical Tape: Insulating mastic compound laminated to flexible, all-

weather vinyl backing; minimum thickness of 90 mil.

B. Heat Shrink Tubing: Heavy-wall, split-resistant, with factory-applied adhesive; rated 600 V;

suitable for direct burial applications; listed as complying with UL 486D.

C. Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed

and suitable for use at the installation temperature.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.

B. Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.

C. Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to

accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70.

D. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Circuiting Requirements:

1. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic.


26 0519 - 9

2. When circuit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing

required.

3. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices.

4. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated, when branch circuits are shown as

separate, combining them together in a single raceway is not permitted.

5. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded conductors among up to three single phase branch circuits of different phases installed in the same

raceway is not permitted. Provide dedicated neutral/grounded conductor for each

individual branch circuit.

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install conductors and cable in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.

D. Installation in Raceway:

1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other contaminants.

2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time.

3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum

pulling tension and sidewall pressure.

4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not

recommended by the manufacturer.

E. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same manner.

F. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support from

building structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems.

1. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conductors and cables to lay on

ceiling tiles.

2. Installation in Vertical Raceways: Provide supports where vertical rise exceeds

permissible limits.

G. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet.

H. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment

enclosures.

I. Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded

conductors inside enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70.

J. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.

1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters.


26 0519 - 10

2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without

cutting, nicking or damaging conductors.

3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.

4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion,

oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces.

5. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

6. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools

and dies.

K. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for

the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced

conductors.

1. Dry Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical tape, or heat shrink tubing.

a. For taped connections, first apply adequate amount of rubber splicing electrical

tape or electrical filler tape, followed by outer covering of vinyl insulating

electrical tape.

b. For taped connections likely to require re-entering, including motor leads, first

apply varnished cambric electrical tape, followed by adequate amount of rubber

splicing electrical tape, followed by outer covering of vinyl insulating electrical tape.

2. Damp Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors,

electrical tape, or heat shrink tubing.

a. For connections with insulating covers, apply outer covering of moisture sealing electrical tape.

b. For taped connections, follow same procedure as for dry locations but apply outer

covering of moisture sealing electrical tape.

3. Wet Locations: Use heat shrink tubing.

L. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.

M. Field-Applied Color Coding: Where vinyl color coding electrical tape is used in lieu of

integrally colored insulation as permitted in Part 2 under "Color Coding", apply half overlapping turns of tape at each termination and at each location conductors are accessible.

N. Identify conductors and cables in accordance with Section 26 0553.

O. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using

materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400.

P. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and

devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system.


26 0519 - 11


A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.2. The insulation resistance test

is required for all conductors. The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as optional is not

required.

D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables.

END OF SECTION



GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0526 - 12

SECTION 26 0526


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Grounding and bonding requirements.

B. Conductors for grounding and bonding.

C. Connectors for grounding and bonding.


A. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Additional

requirements for conductors for grounding and bonding, including conductor color coding.

B. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.


A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010.

B. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;

International Electrical Testing Association; 2013 (ANSI/NETA ATS).

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and

Supplements.

D. UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Coordination:






Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


26 0526 - 13

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS

A. Existing Work: Where existing grounding and bonding system components are indicated to be

reused, they may be reused only where they are free from corrosion, integrity and continuity are

verified, and where acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.

B. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors,

connectors, conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete

grounding and bonding system.

D. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.

E. Bonding and Equipment Grounding:

1. Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses, metallic equipment enclosures, metallic raceways and boxes, device grounding terminals, and

other normally non-current-carrying conductive materials enclosing electrical

conductors/equipment or likely to become energized as indicated and in accordance with

NFPA 70.

2. Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and branch circuit

raceway. Do not use raceways as sole equipment grounding conductor.

3. Where circuit conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop, increase size of equipment grounding conductor proportionally in accordance with NFPA 70.

4. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit

equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

5. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipment ground bus only. Do not terminate on neutral (grounded) or isolated/insulated ground

bus.

6. Provide bonding jumper across expansion or expansion/deflection fittings provided to

accommodate conduit movement.

7. Provide bonding for interior metal piping systems in accordance with NFPA 70. This

includes, but is not limited to:

a. Metal water piping where not already effectively bonded to metal underground water pipe used as grounding electrode.

b. Refrigerant Piping.

2.2 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS

A. General Requirements:

1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.


26 0526 - 14

2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable.

B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 0526:

1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated.

a. Exceptions:

1) Use bare copper conductors where installed underground in direct contact

with earth.

2) Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete (not in

raceway).

C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding:

1. Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the conductors and items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, use exothermic welded connections for underground,

concealed and other inaccessible connections.

3. Unless otherwise indicated, use mechanical connectors, compression connectors, or

exothermic welded connections for accessible connections.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has been completed.

B. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install grounding and bonding system components in a neat and workmanlike manner in

accordance with NECA 1.

C. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors.

1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without

cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate

insertion into connector.

2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, and

contact surfaces.

3. Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for the

items to be connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.


26 0526 - 15

4. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended

torque settings.

5. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools

and dies.

D. Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 26 0553.



B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS except Section 4.

C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.

END OF SECTION



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0529 - 16

SECTION 26 0529


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Support and attachment components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes, and other electrical

work.


A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.

B. Section 26 0534 - Conduit: Additional support and attachment requirements for conduits.

C. Section 26 0537 - Boxes: Additional support and attachment requirements for boxes.

D. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Additional support and attachment requirements for

interior luminaires.


A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2015.

B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware; 2009.

C. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel; 2013.

D. MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication; Metal Framing Manufacturers Association;

2004.

E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical


F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition


G. UL 5B - Strut-Type Channel Raceways and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Coordination:


26 0529 - 17

1. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipment and

components to be installed.

2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials

required for installation.

3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting surfaces

at the installed locations.

4. Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment and other

potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.

5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:

1. Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until concrete has

fully cured in accordance with Section 03 3000.


A. Comply with NFPA 70.

B. Comply with applicable building code.

C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS


1. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and

hardware as necessary for the complete installation of electrical work.

2. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended, where applicable.

3. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in

accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to be supported with a minimum safety factor of _____. Include consideration for vibration,

equipment operation, and shock loads where applicable.

4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product

listing.

5. Do not use wire, chain, perforated pipe strap, or wood for permanent supports unless

specifically indicated or permitted.

6. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment where

installed.


26 0529 - 18

a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or approved equivalent unless


b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel, stainless steel,

or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated.

c. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633.

d. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M.

B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be

supported.

1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron.

2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated.

C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported.

D. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel (strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly of supports.

1. Comply with MFMA-4.

2. Channel (Strut) Used as Raceway (only where specifically indicated): Listed and labeled

as complying with UL 5B.

3. Channel Material:

a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use painted steel, zinc-plated steel, or galvanized steel.

b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use stainless steel, galvanized steel

or fiberglass composite.

E. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated.

1. Minimum Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:

a. Equipment Supports: 1/2 inch diameter.

b. Single Conduit up to 1 inch (27mm) trade size: 1/4 inch diameter.

c. Single Conduit larger than 1 inch (27mm) trade size: 3/8 inch diameter.

d. Trapeze Support for Multiple Conduits: 3/8 inch diameter.

e. Outlet Boxes: 1/4 inch diameter.

f. Luminaires: 1/4 inch diameter.

F. Non-Penetrating Rooftop Supports for Low-Slope Roofs: Steel pedestals with thermoplastic or

rubber bases that rest on top of roofing membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roof

structure and not penetrating the roofing assembly, with support fixtures as specified.

1. Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing

assembly.


26 0529 - 19

2. Attachment/Support Fixtures: As recommended by manufacturer, same type as indicated

for equivalent indoor hangers and supports.

3. Mounting Height: Provide minimum clearance of 6 inches under supported component

to top of roofing.

G. Anchors and Fasteners:

1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and fastener types indicated for the specified applications.

2. Concrete: Use preset concrete inserts, expansion anchors, or screw anchors.

3. Solid or Grout-Filled Masonry: Use expansion anchors or screw anchors.

4. Hollow Masonry: Use toggle bolts.

5. Hollow Stud Walls: Use toggle bolts.

6. Steel: Use beam clamps or machine bolts.

7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.

8. Wood: Use wood screws.

9. Plastic and lead anchors are not permitted.

10. Powder-actuated fasteners are permitted only as follows:

a. Where approved by Architect.

11. Hammer-driven anchors and fasteners are not permitted.

12. Preset Concrete Inserts: Continuous metal channel (strut) and spot inserts specifically

designed to be cast in concrete ceilings, walls, and floors.

a. Comply with MFMA-4.

b. Channel Material: Use galvanized steel.

c. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of metal channel (strut) framing system.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components.


3.2 INSTALLATION



26 0529 - 20

B. Install support and attachment components in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance

with NECA 1.

C. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with ICC Evaluation Services, LLC (ICC-ES)

evaluation report conditions of use where applicable.

D. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,

ductwork, or other systems.

E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from suspended

ceiling support system or ceiling grid.

F. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from roof deck.

G. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural

Engineer.

H. Equipment Support and Attachment:

1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) to support equipment as required.

2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted on

hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.

3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface.

4. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on

its own weight for support.

I. Conduit Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 0534.

J. Box Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 0537.

K. Interior Luminaire Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 5100.

L. Preset Concrete Inserts: Use manufacturer provided closure strips to inhibit concrete seepage during concrete pour.

M. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

N. Remove temporary supports.

O. Identify independent electrical component support wires above accessible ceilings (only where specifically indicated or permitted) with color distinguishable from ceiling support wires in

accordance with NFPA 70.


A. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects.

B. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.


26 0529 - 21

C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment components.

END OF SECTION



CONDUIT 26 0534 - 22

SECTION 26 0534

CONDUIT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).

B. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC).

C. PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).

D. Flexible metal conduit (FMC).

E. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC).

F. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

G. Conduit fittings.

H. Accessories.


A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.

B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

D. Section 26 0537 - Boxes.

E. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.


A. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2005.

B. ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT); 2005.

C. ANSI C80.6 - American National Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit (EIMC);

2005.

D. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical


E. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT); National Electrical


CONDUIT 26 0534 - 23

F. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic

Tubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/NEMA FB 1).

G. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit

and Intermediate Metal Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005.

H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition


I. UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

J. UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

K. UL 360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

L. UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

M. UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

N. UL 1242 - Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.

2. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, piping,

equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.

3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, and equipment installed under other sections or by others.

4. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that preserve the

integrity of the roofing system and do not void the roof warranty.

5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:

1. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit is complete between outlet, junction and splicing points.



B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.

CONDUIT 26 0534 - 24

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS

A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicated

for the specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with the

most restrictive requirements. Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

C. Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal

conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

D. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate

metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

E. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate

metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

F. Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate

metal conduit (IMC).

G. Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit,

intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

H. Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or

intermediate metal conduit (IMC).

1. Locations subject to physical damage include, but are not limited to:

a. Where exposed below 8 feet, except within electrical and communication rooms or

closets.

I. Exposed, Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit

(IMC).

J. Concealed, Exterior, Not Embedded in Concrete or in Contact With Earth: Use galvanized steel

rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit (IMC).

K. Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit.

1. Maximum Length: 6 feet.

L. Connections to Vibrating Equipment:

1. Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit.

2. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

CONDUIT 26 0534 - 25

3. Maximum Length: 6 feet unless otherwise indicated.

4. Vibrating equipment includes, but is not limited to:

a. Motors.

M. Fished in Existing Walls, Where Necessary: Use flexible metal conduit.

2.2 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS

A. Existing Work: Where existing conduits are indicated to be reused, they may be reused only where they comply with specified requirements, are free from corrosion, and integrity is

verified by pulling a mandrel through them.

B. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system.

C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

D. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:

1. Branch Circuits: 1/2 inch (16 mm) trade size.

2. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.

3. Control Circuits: 1/2 inch (16 mm) trade size.

4. Flexible Connections to Luminaires: 1/2 inch (16 mm) trade size.

E. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable

minimum size requirements specified.

2.3 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI

C80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.

B. Fittings:

1. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.

2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.

2.4 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type IMC galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit complying with

ANSI C80.6 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 1242.

B. Fittings:

1. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and

labeled as complying with UL 514B.

CONDUIT 26 0534 - 26


3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.

2.5 PVC-COATED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit with external polyvinyl

chloride (PVC) coating complying with NEMA RN 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.

B. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), nominal thickness of 40 mil.

C. PVC-Coated Fittings:

1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of PVC-coated conduit to be installed.

2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.


4. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 40 mil.

D. PVC-Coated Supports: Furnish with exterior coating of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 15 mil.

2.6 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled

as complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used.

B. Fittings:

1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying

with UL 514B.


2.7 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal

conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 360.

B. Fittings:

1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying

with UL 514B.


2.8 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3

and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797.

CONDUIT 26 0534 - 27

B. Fittings:

1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.


3. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) or set-screw type.

a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings.

2.9 ACCESSORIES

A. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the

conduit to be installed.

B. Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound-force.

C. Modular Seals for Conduit Penetrations: Rated for minimum of 40 psig; Suitable for the

conduits to be installed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits.


3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Install conduit in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.

C. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101.

D. Install intermediate metal conduit (IMC) in accordance with NECA 101.

E. Install PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) using only tools approved by

the manufacturer.

F. Conduit Routing:

1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic.

2. When conduit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing

required.

3. Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed.

4. Conduits in the following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated:

a. Electrical rooms.

CONDUIT 26 0534 - 28

b. Mechanical equipment rooms.

c. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.

5. Unless otherwise approved, do not route conduits exposed:

a. Across roofs.

b. Across top of parapet walls.

c. Across building exterior surfaces.

6. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access.

7. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of three 90 degree bends between

pull points.

8. Arrange conduit to provide no more than 150 feet between pull points.

9. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at

sealing fittings where moisture may collect.

10. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches between conduits and piping for other systems.

G. Conduit Support:

1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 0529 using

suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from

piping, ductwork, or other systems.

3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support

system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles.

4. Use conduit strap to support single surface-mounted conduit.

a. Use clamp back spacer with conduit strap for damp and wet locations to provide

space between conduit and mounting surface.

5. Use metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel

surface-mounted conduits.

6. Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod.

7. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut) with

accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits.

8. Use non-penetrating rooftop supports to support conduits routed across rooftops (only

where approved).

9. Use of spring steel conduit clips for support of conduits is not permitted.

10. Use of wire for support of conduits is not permitted.

11. Where conduit support intervals specified in NFPA 70 and NECA standards differ,

comply with the most stringent requirements.

CONDUIT 26 0534 - 29

H. Connections and Terminations:

1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanized steel conduits prior to making connections.

2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece

couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads.

3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another.

4. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of

liquid into connectors.

5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock

nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations.

6. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect

conductors.

7. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical continuity.

I. Penetrations:

1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and

grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer.

2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set

sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.

4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground.

5. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point

to prevent entry of moisture and gases.

6. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of membrane.

7. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings

and curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations

are necessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty. Include proposed locations of penetrations and methods for

sealing with submittals.

8. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400.

J. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion

and expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected

equipment. This includes, but is not limited to:

1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection.

2. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost.

CONDUIT 26 0534 - 30

K. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantial

temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an accessible point near the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to:

1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces.

2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces.

L. Provide pull string in all empty conduits and in conduits where conductors and cables are to be installed by others. Leave minimum slack of 12 inches at each end.

M. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.

N. Identify conduits in accordance with Section 26 0553.


A. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.

B. Where coating of PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) contains cuts or

abrasions, repair in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide protection

from entry of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for installation of

conductors.

END OF SECTION



BOXES 26 0537 - 31

SECTION 26 0537

BOXES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches, including those used as junction and pull boxes.

B. Cabinets and enclosures, including junction and pull boxes larger than 100 cubic inches.


A. Section 08 3100 - Access Doors and Panels: Panels for maintaining access to concealed boxes.

B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

D. Section 26 0534 - Conduit:

1. Conduit bodies and other fittings.

2. Additional requirements for locating boxes to limit conduit length and/or number of

bends between pulling points.

E. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.

F. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices:

1. Wall plates.

2. Additional requirements for locating boxes for wiring devices.


A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical


B. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; National Electrical


C. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic

Tubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/NEMA FB 1).

D. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; National

Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2013 (ANSI/NEMA OS 1).

E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2014.

BOXES 26 0537 - 32



G. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current

Edition, Including All Revisions.

H. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

I. UL 508A - Industrial Control Panels; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

J. UL 514A - Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping,

equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.

2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance

requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement of conductors, clamps, support fittings, and devices, calculated according to NFPA 70.

4. Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement of

connected conduits, calculated according to NFPA 70.

5. Coordinate the placement of boxes with millwork, furniture, devices, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others.

6. Coordinate the work with other trades to preserve insulation integrity.

7. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush-mounted boxes where indicated.



1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for junction and

pull boxes and cabinets and enclosures.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations for outlet and device boxes, pull boxes,

cabinets and enclosures, floor boxes, and underground boxes/enclosures.

C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

2. Keys for Lockable Enclosures: Two of each different key.

BOXES 26 0537 - 33





jurisdiction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 BOXES


1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by

NFPA 70 and product listing.

2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway

system and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed.

3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.

5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors

terminate.

B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction and Pull

Boxes:

1. Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required.

2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise indicated or required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers.

3. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes where exposed galvanized steel rigid metal

conduit or exposed intermediate metal conduit (IMC) is used.

4. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete.

5. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls.

6. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration

where required.

7. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction.

8. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall.

9. Sheet-Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying with UL

514A.

10. Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with UL

514A; furnish with threaded hubs.

BOXES 26 0537 - 34

11. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and

weight of load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting of luminaire where required.

12. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not

use field-connected gangable boxes.

13. Minimum Box Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:

a. Wiring Devices (Other Than Communications Systems Outlets): 4 inch square by

1-1/2 inch deep (100 by 38 mm) trade size.

b. Ceiling Outlets: 4 inch octagonal or square by 1-1/2 inch deep (100 by 38 mm) trade size.

14. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 26 2726.

C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:

1. Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL 508A.

2. NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated:

a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1, painted steel.

b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R, painted steel.

3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:

a. Provide screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated.

b. Boxes 6 square feet and Larger: Provide sectionalized screw-cover or hinged-

cover enclosures.

4. Cabinets and Hinged-Cover Enclosures, Other Than Junction and Pull Boxes:

a. Provide lockable hinged covers, all locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.

b. Terminal Blocks: Provide voltage/current ratings and terminal quantity suitable

for purpose indicated, with 25 percent spare terminal capacity.

5. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise

indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive boxes.


BOXES 26 0537 - 35

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where

applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where

mounting heights are not indicated.

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems.

E. Flush-mount boxes in finished areas unless specifically indicated to be surface-mounted.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, boxes may be surface-mounted where exposed conduits are indicated or permitted.

G. Box Locations:

1. Locate boxes to be accessible. Provide access panels in accordance with Section 08 3100 as required where approved by the Architect.

2. Unless dimensioned, box locations indicated are approximate.

3. Locate boxes as required for devices installed under other sections or by others.

a. Switches, Receptacles, and Other Wiring Devices: Comply with Section 26 2726.

4. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes.

5. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints.

6. Unless otherwise indicated, where multiple outlet boxes are installed at the same location

at different mounting heights, install along a common vertical center line.

7. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back. Provide

minimum 6 inches horizontal separation unless otherwise indicated.

8. Acoustic-Rated Walls: Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls

back-to-back; provide minimum 24 inches horizontal separation.

9. Fire Resistance Rated Walls: Install flush-mounted boxes such that the required fire

resistance will not be reduced.

a. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back; provide minimum 24 inches separation where wall is constructed with individual

noncommunicating stud cavities or protect both boxes with listed putty pads.

b. Do not install flush-mounted boxes with area larger than 16 square inches or such

that the total aggregate area of openings exceeds 100 square inches for any 100 square feet of wall area.

10. Locate junction and pull boxes as indicated, as required to facilitate installation of

conductors, and to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling points in accordance with Section 26 0534.

BOXES 26 0537 - 36

11. Locate junction and pull boxes in the following areas, unless otherwise indicated or

approved by the Architect:

a. Concealed above accessible suspended ceilings.

b. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.

c. Electrical rooms.

d. Mechanical equipment rooms.

e. Where otherwise indicated.

H. Box Supports:

1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 0529 using

suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other

than boxes used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections in

accordance with NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.

3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling grid or

ceiling support system.

4. Use far-side support to secure flush-mounted boxes supported from single stud in hollow stud walls. Repair or replace supports for boxes that permit excessive movement.

I. Install boxes plumb and level.

J. Flush-Mounted Boxes:

1. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is not set back from finished surface

more than 1/4 inch or does not project beyond finished surface.

2. Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is flush with finished surface.

3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile,

gypsum, plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8 inch at the

edge of the box.

K. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity.

L. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent

devices exceeds 300 V.

M. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400.

N. Close unused box openings.

O. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment installed or designated for future use.

BOXES 26 0537 - 37

P. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.

Q. Identify boxes in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Immediately after installation, protect boxes from entry of moisture and foreign material until

ready for installation of conductors.

END OF SECTION



IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0553 - 38

SECTION 26 0553


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Electrical identification requirements.

B. Identification nameplates and labels.

C. Wire and cable markers.

D. Voltage markers.

E. Warning signs and labels.


A. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Color coding for

power conductors and cables 600 V and less; vinyl color coding electrical tape.

B. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices - Lutron: Device and wallplate finishes; factory pre-marked

wallplates.


A. ANSI Z535.2 - American National Standard for Environmental and Facility Safety Signs; 2011.

B. ANSI Z535.4 - American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels; 2011.

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and

Supplements.

D. NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace; National Fire Protection

Association; 2015.

E. UL 969 - Marking and Labeling Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Coordination:

1. Verify final designations for equipment, systems, and components to be identified prior to fabrication of identification products.

B. Sequencing:


26 0553 - 39

1. Do not conceal items to be identified, in locations such as above suspended ceilings, until

identification products have been installed.

2. Do not install identification products until final surface finishes and painting are

complete.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each product.

B. Shop Drawings: Provide schedule of items to be identified indicating proposed designations,

materials, legends, and formats.

C. Samples:

1. Identification Nameplates: One of each type and color specified.

2. Warning Signs and Labels: One of each type and legend specified.



1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install adhesive products when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by

manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Existing Work: Unless specifically excluded, identify existing elements to remain that are not

already identified in accordance with specified requirements.

B. Identification for Equipment:

1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components.

a. Switchboards:

1) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within

sight of equipment.

2) Use identification nameplate to identify main overcurrent protective device.

3) Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch

device. Do not identify spares and spaces.

b. Panelboards:

1) Identify ampere rating.

2) Identify voltage and phase.


26 0553 - 40


sight of equipment.

4) Identify main overcurrent protective device. Use identification label for

panelboards with a door. For power distribution panelboards without a door,

use identification nameplate.

5) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards with a door. Identify spares and spaces using pencil.

6) For power panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate to

identify load(s) served for each branch device. Identify spares and spaces.

c. Enclosed switches, circuit breakers, and motor controllers:

1) Identify voltage and phase.


sight of equipment.

3) Identify load(s) served. Include location when not within sight of

equipment.

2. Use identification label on inside of door at each fused switch to identify required NEMA

fuse class and size.

3. Use identification label to identify overcurrent protective devices for branch circuits

serving fire alarm circuits. Identify with text "FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT".

4. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels: Use warning labels to identify arc flash hazards for electrical equipment, such as switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, meter

socket enclosures, and motor control centers that are likely to require examination,

adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized.

a. Minimum Size: 3.5 by 5 inches.

b. Legend: Include orange header that reads "WARNING", followed by the word

message "Arc Flash and Shock Hazard; Appropriate PPE Required; Do not operate

controls or open covers without appropriate personal protection equipment; Failure to comply may result in injury or death; Refer to NFPA 70E for minimum PPE

requirements" or approved equivalent.

C. Identification for Conductors and Cables:

1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 0519.

2. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for ungrounded

and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of feeder or

branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served

by more than one nominal voltage system.

3. Use wire and cable markers to identify circuit number or other designation indicated for

power, control, and instrumentation conductors and cables at the following locations:

a. At each source and load connection.


26 0553 - 41

b. Within boxes when more than one circuit is present.

c. Within equipment enclosures when conductors and cables enter or leave the enclosure.

D. Identification for Boxes:

1. Use identification labels to identify circuits enclosed.

E. Identification for Devices:

1. Wiring Device and Wallplate Finishes: Comply with Section 26 2726.

2. Use identification label to identify fire alarm system devices.

a. For devices concealed above suspended ceilings, provide additional identification

on ceiling tile below device location.

3. Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify serving branch circuit for all

receptacles.

a. For receptacles in public areas or in areas as directed by Architect, provide

identification on inside surface of wallplate.

4. Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify load controlled for wall-

mounted control devices controlling loads that are not visible from the control location

and for multiple wall-mounted control devices installed at one location.

2.2 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS

A. Identification Nameplates:

1. Materials:

a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates.

b. Outdoor Locations: Use plastic, stainless steel, or aluminum nameplates suitable

for exterior use.

2. Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated acrylic or electrically non-

conductive phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch; engraved text.

a. Exception: Provide minimum thickness of 1/8 inch when any dimension is greater

than 4 inches.

3. Stainless Steel Nameplates: Minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser-etched text.

4. Aluminum Nameplates: Anodized; minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser-

etched text.

5. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1 inch high; Four, located at corners for larger sizes.

B. Identification Labels:


26 0553 - 42

1. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and

abrasion resistant.

2. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unless


C. Format for Equipment Identification:

1. Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches.

2. Legend:

a. Equipment designation or other approved description.

3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

4. Minimum Text Height:

a. System Designation: 1 inch.

b. Equipment Designation: 1/2 inch.

5. Color:

a. Normal Power System: White text on black background.

D. Format for Caution and Warning Messages:

1. Minimum Size: 2 inches by 4 inches.

2. Legend: Include information or instructions indicated or as required for proper and safe

operation and maintenance.

3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

4. Minimum Text Height: 1/2 inch.

5. Color: Black text on yellow background unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS

A. Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl cloth, wrap-around

self-adhesive vinyl self-laminating, heat-shrink sleeve, plastic sleeve, plastic clip-on, or vinyl

split sleeve type markers suitable for the conductor or cable to be identified.

B. Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon cable ties.

C. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.

D. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text, all capitalized unless otherwise

indicated.

1. Do not use handwritten text.

E. Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch.

F. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated.


26 0553 - 43

2.4 VOLTAGE MARKERS

A. Markers for Boxes and Equipment Enclosures: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl or self-adhesive vinyl cloth type markers.

B. Minimum Size:

1. Markers for Equipment: 1 1/8 by 4 1/2 inches.

2. Markers for Pull Boxes: 1 1/8 by 4 1/2 inches.

3. Markers for Junction Boxes: 1/2 by 2 1/4 inches.

C. Legend:

1. Markers for Voltage Identification: Highest voltage present.

D. Color: Black text on orange background unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable.

B. Warning Signs:

1. Materials:

a. Indoor Dry, Clean Locations: Use factory pre-printed rigid plastic or self-adhesive

vinyl signs.

b. Outdoor Locations: Use factory pre-printed rigid aluminum or self-adhesive vinyl

signs.

2. Rigid Signs: Provide four mounting holes at corners for mechanical fasteners.

3. Minimum Size: 7 by 10 inches unless otherwise indicated.

C. Warning Labels:

1. Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester or self-adhesive vinyl labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant; produced using

materials recognized to UL 969.

a. Do not use labels designed to be completed using handwritten text.

2. Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and accessories

recommended by label manufacturer.

3. Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions.


26 0553 - 44

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and

maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows:

1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front.

2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door.

3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with rear

access.

4. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform.

5. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device.

6. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access.

7. Boxes: Outside face of cover.

8. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access.

9. Devices: Outside face of cover.

C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified.

D. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to interior

surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement.

E. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or wrinkles and edges properly sealed.

F. Secure rigid signs using stainless steel screws.

G. Mark all handwritten text, where permitted, to be neat and legible.


A. Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles, wrinkles, curling or other signs

of improper adhesion.

END OF SECTION



EQUIPMENT WIRING 26 2717 - 45

SECTION 26 2717

EQUIPMENT WIRING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Electrical connections to equipment.


A. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.

B. Section 26 0534 - Conduit.

C. Section 26 0537 - Boxes.

D. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices.

E. Section 26 2818 - Enclosed Switches.


A. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical

Manufacturers Association; 1999 (R 2010).

B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical

Manufacturers Association; 2012.

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition



A. Coordination:

1. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections.

2. Determine connection locations and requirements.

B. Sequencing:

1. Install rough-in of electrical connections before installation of equipment is required.

2. Make electrical connections before required start-up of equipment.


1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide wiring device manufacturer’s catalog information showing dimensions, configurations, and construction.

B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by

product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,

preparation, and installation of product.



B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cords and Caps: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for

equipment.

1. Colors: Conform to NEMA WD 1.

2. Cord Construction: NFPA 70, Type SO, multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations.

3. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch

circuit overcurrent protection.

B. Disconnect Switches: As specified in Section 26 2818 and in individual equipment sections.

C. Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 26 2726.

D. Flexible Conduit: As specified in Section 26 0534.

E. Wire and Cable: As specified in Section 26 0519.

F. Boxes: As specified in Section 26 0537.

2.2 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.


3.2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions.

B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit

with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.

C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for

temperatures encountered.

D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug.

E. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required.

F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and

equipment connection boxes.

G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete

equipment wiring requirements.

H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.

I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete

equipment wiring requirements.

END OF SECTION



WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 48

SECTION 26 2726

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Wall switches.

B. Receptacles.

C. Wall plates.


A. Section 26 0537 - Boxes.

B. Section 26 0537 - Boxes.

C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.


A. FS W-C-596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; Federal Specification; Revision G, 2001.

B. FS W-S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush-mounted (General Specification);

Federal Specification; Revision F, 1999.

C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010.

D. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical

Manufacturers Association; 1999 (R 2010).

E. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Specifications; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012.



G. UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

H. UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

I. UL 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


J. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc.

installed under other sections or by others.

2. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements of actual equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face block, to

provide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices.

4. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:

1. Do not install wiring devices until final surface finishes are complete.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and

configurations.



B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Where possible, provide products for each type of wiring device produced

by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.

2.2 WIRING DEVICE APPLICATIONS

A. Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served.

B. Provide weather resistant GFCI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for receptacles installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations.


2.3 WIRING DEVICE FINISHES

A. Provide wiring device finishes as described below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Wiring Devices, Unless Otherwise Indicated: White with white nylon wall plate.

C. Wiring Devices Installed in Finished Spaces: White with white nylon wall plate.

D. Wiring Devices Installed in Unfinished Spaces: White with galvanized steel wall plate.

E. Wiring Devices Installed in Wet or Damp Locations: White with specified weatherproof cover.

2.4 WALL SWITCHES

A. Wall Switches - General Requirements: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches

with silver alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as

complying with UL 20 and where applicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings.

1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp

for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.

B. Standard Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with standard toggle

type switch actuator and maintained contacts; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.

2.5 RECEPTACLES

A. Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and

NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types as indicated on the drawings.

1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for

back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.

2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6.

B. Convenience Receptacles:

1. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-

20R; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

2. Weather Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V,

NEMA 5-20R, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498

Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

C. GFCI Receptacles:

1. GFCI Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-testing, with feed-through protection

and light to indicate ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection; listed as complying with UL 943, class A.

2. Standard GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA

5-20R, rectangular decorator style.


3. Weather Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V,

NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations.

2.6 WALL PLATES

A. Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D.

1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiring devices.

2. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish.

B. Nylon Wall Plates: Smooth finish, high-impact thermoplastic.

C. Galvanized Steel Wall Plates: Rounded corners and edges, with corrosion resistant screws.

D. Weatherproof Covers for Wet Locations: Gasketed, thermoplastic, with hinged lockable cover

and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations while in use with

attachment plugs connected and identified as extra-duty type.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are

properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.

C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.

D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.

E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices.

F. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.

B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where

applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0537 as required for installation

of wiring devices provided under this section.


1. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise indicated.

2. Where multiple receptacles, wall switches, or wall dimmers are installed at the same location and at the same mounting height, gang devices together under a common wall

plate.

3. Locate wall switches on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3 inches from edge of

door frame. Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify Architect to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

4. Locate receptacles for electric drinking fountains concealed behind drinking fountain

according to manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent

devices exceeds 300 V.

E. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do not connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals.

F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal and

tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-in

pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding.

G. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit

equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

H. Provide GFCI receptacles with integral GFCI protection at each location indicated. Do not use feed-through wiring to protect downstream devices.

I. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.

J. Install wall switches with OFF position down.

K. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontally mounted receptacles with grounding pole on left.

L. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely

covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or

improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement.

M. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed

or designated for future use.

N. Identify wiring devices in accordance with Section 26 0553.


A. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects.

B. Operate each wall switch, wall dimmer, and fan speed controller with circuit energized to verify proper operation.

C. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity.


D. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's

instructions.

E. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match

original factory finish.

END OF SECTION



FUSES 26 2813 - 54

SECTION 26 2813

FUSES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Fuses.



A. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;

2012.

B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and

Supplements.

C. UL 248-1 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 1: General Requirements; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.

D. UL 248-12 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 12: Class R Fuses; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.


A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate fuse clips furnished in equipment provided under other sections for

compatibility with indicated fuses.

2. Coordinate fuse requirements according to manufacturer's recommendations and

nameplate data for actual equipment to be installed.



1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data sheets including voltage and current

ratings, interrupting ratings, time-current curves, and current limitation curves.



FUSES 26 2813 - 55



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders:

1. Fusible Switches up to 600 Amperes: Class RK1, time-delay.

B. Individual Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time-delay.

2.2 FUSES

A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide fuses for all fusible equipment as required

for a complete operating system.

C. Provide fuses of the same type, rating, and manufacturer within the same switch.

D. Comply with UL 248-1.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide cartridge type fuses complying with NEMA FU 1, Class

and ratings as indicated.

F. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage.

G. Class R Fuses: Comply with UL 248-12.

H. Provide the following accessories where indicated or where required to complete installation:

1. Fuseholders: Compatible with indicated fuses.

2. Fuse Reducers: For adapting indicated fuses to permit installation in switch designed for

fuses with larger ampere ratings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that fuse ratings are consistent with circuit voltage and manufacturer's recommendations

and nameplate data for equipment.

B. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Do not install fuses until circuits are ready to be energized.

FUSES 26 2813 - 56

B. Install fuses with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read.

END OF SECTION



ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 2818 - 57

SECTION 26 2818

ENCLOSED SWITCHES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Enclosed safety switches.


A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.


A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical


B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2014.

C. NEMA KS 1 - Heavy Duty Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches (600 Volts Maximum); National

Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2013.

D. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2013 (ANSI/NETA ATS).

E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition


F. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current

Edition, Including All Revisions.

G. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

H. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Coordination:


1. Coordinate the work with other trades. Avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment,

or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and within working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.

2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance

requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

3. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.



1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for enclosed

switches and other installed components and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage and current ratings, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and

installed features and accessories.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use

stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product.

D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of enclosed switches.





jurisdiction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com.

B. General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com.

C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us.

D. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com.

E. Source Limitations: Furnish enclosed switches and associated components produced by the

same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtained from a single supplier.


2.2 ENCLOSED SAFETY SWITCHES

A. Description: Quick-make, quick-break enclosed safety switches listed and labeled as complying with UL 98; heavy duty; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the

following service conditions:

1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet.

2. Ambient Temperature: Between -22 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

D. Horsepower Rating: Suitable for connected load.

E. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage.

F. Short Circuit Current Rating:

1. Minimum Ratings:

a. Heavy Duty Single Throw Switches Protected by Class R, Class J, Class L, or

Class T Fuses: 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes.

G. Provide with switch blade contact position that is visible when the cover is open.

H. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

I. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each enclosed safety switch, with a suitable

lug for terminating each equipment grounding conductor.

J. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E.

1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the

following installation locations:

K. Provide safety interlock to prevent opening the cover with the switch in the ON position with

capability of overriding interlock for testing purposes.

L. Heavy Duty Switches:

1. Comply with NEMA KS 1.

2. Conductor Terminations:

a. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper

conductors.

3. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position, capable of accepting three padlocks.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



B. Verify that the ratings of the enclosed switches are consistent with the indicated requirements.

C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive enclosed safety switches.

D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install enclosed switches in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install enclosed switches securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions and NFPA 70.

D. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 0529.

E. Install enclosed switches plumb.

F. Except where indicated to be mounted adjacent to the equipment they supply, mount enclosed

switches such that the highest position of the operating handle does not exceed 79 inches above

the floor or working platform.

G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.

H. Identify enclosed switches in accordance with Section 26 0553.



B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.1.1.

D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective enclosed safety switches or associated

components.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended

torque settings.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from switch enclosures and components according to manufacturer's

instructions.

B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION